JP2020120728A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve interest of a performance related to a game machine capable of setting any setting value among a plurality of setting values.SOLUTION: When a split performance for updating a first performance image 27TM100, and updating a second performance image 27TM200 is being executed, an execution ratio of a fifth setting suggestive performance to the first performance image 27TM100 is 40%, and the execution ratio of the fifth setting suggestive performance to the second performance image 27TM200 is 20%, that is, the execution ratio of the fifth setting suggestive performance to the first performance image 27TM100 is higher than the execution ratio of the fifth setting suggestive performance to the second performance image 27TM200.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-21

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, and that displays a character image according to the setting value before and after the setting change Proposed.

JP, 2010-200902, A (Drawing 12).

Regarding the gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values as described in Patent Document 1, the player feels interesting when the effect that suggests the setting is executed. It is preferable to do so.

The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of production related to a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Advantageous state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
A notice production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice production (pseudo continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (big hit game state) will be achieved.
A suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (fifth setting suggestion effect) for making a setting suggestion;
Specific effect control means capable of executing the specific effect (divided effect) that updates the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updates the second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display ( And a production control CPU 120),
The notice production control means (production control CPU 120) is a pseudo suggestion of the display result of the change display determined in the change start time production determination process corresponding to the first display (first production image 27TM100). Continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach, and the second display (second production image 27TM200) and notice production corresponding to the second display (pseudo continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach as image in movie) ) Is possible,
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can change the mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the first display and the mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the second display (first effect image 27TM100). The execution ratio (40%) of the fifth setting suggestive effect corresponding to is higher than the execution ratio (20%) of the fifth setting suggestive effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of suggestive production.

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The notice production control means (production control CPU 120) has a form of notice production corresponding to the first display (first production image 27TM100) and a notice production corresponding to the second display (second production image 27TM200). It is possible to change the mode (the number of times the pseudo continuous production is executed (2 times and 1 time), the mode of the cut-in image (“great chance!!” and “chance!”), and appearance during super reach. Characters to do (Character B and Character A)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2,
With the end of the specific effect, the specific effect control unit (effect control CPU 120) ends the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other (for the divided effect). Even after the end, common with the effect information (the image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) and the four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the division effect. Production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, even after the specific effect is finished, the update of either the first display or the second display is continued, so that the interest of continuing the update of the display is played. Can be felt by the person.

The game machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3,
The suggestive effect is a first suggestive effect (first setting suggestive effect) in which the display ratio of the special display (combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] minislot symbols) is different according to the set value. Including,
The gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused with the execution of the first suggestive effect.

The game machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4,
The suggestive effect includes a second suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) that suggests a specific setting value (setting value is “6”),
The game machine characterized in that the suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 confirmation effect)) corresponding to the second display.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused with the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The game machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B5,
A movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable object (movable object 27TM600);
An operation promotion display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350) for prompting an operation,
The operation unit (push button 31B) is provided with an operation unit control unit (production control CPU 120) capable of operating in an operation promoting mode (flashing mode).
The operation promotion display means (production control CPU 120) has an operation promotion display corresponding to the first display (operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17(9)) and an operation promotion display corresponding to the second display. (Operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed,
The operation unit control means (production control CPU 120) does not set the operation unit to the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), a divided effect is executed). In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light off mode))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
A production device that is operable when the specific production is not being executed and is inoperative when the specific production is being executed (in the case of a variation pattern that does not involve divisional production, a mode of the push button 31B) It is possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the effect, but in the case of the variation pattern involving the divided effect, it is not possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the mode of the push button 31B).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7,
A movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable object (movable object 27TM600);
A related information display control unit (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying related information (pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect,
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable object effect when the specific effect is being executed,
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16(4), when the divided effect is being executed, the pseudo-relationship is performed. In response to the execution of the effect [Y: strong], the pseudo effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable object effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8,
A display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying parallax images (stereoscopic images) in which right-eye images and left-eye images are alternately arranged in the horizontal direction, and a left eye of a player provided in front of the display body And a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for blocking the visual recognition of the right-eye image by the player and the visual recognition of the left-eye image by the player's right eye, and an image display unit (production control CPU 120). ,
The image display unit (display control unit 123) limits the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (the stereoscopic image is not displayed when the division effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means B10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9,
Corresponding display control means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
Change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) for changing the display mode of the correspondence display,
The correspondence display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the correspondence display in an area (first reserved display area 27TM011, active display area 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display,
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (changes the display mode of the hold display and the active display when the division effect is being executed). I try not to let it)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific effect.

The game machine of means B11 is
The gaming machine according to any of the means B1 to B10,
The notice production control unit (production control CPU 120) has a first notice production (one pseudo continuous production) as the notice production and a second control in which the advantageous state is controlled to be higher than the first notice production. It is possible to execute a notice production (two simulated productions),
The specific effect control unit (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect). Continue updating image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the second display (second effect image having a short display period). The first effect image 27TM100, which has a longer display period, has a higher proportion of effect information having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the 27TM200).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player comes to have an expectation that the one in which the second notice effect is being executed is the first display, and that the update is continued even after the end of the particular effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

The game machine of means B12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B11,
A variable display means (CPU 103) for performing variable display (variable display) based on the variable display pattern (variable pattern),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to a variable display pattern (variable pattern), and the timing for ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized by being set to any one of a plurality of finish timings (timing TA1 and timing TA2 as shown in FIG. 10-8).
With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern accompanied by a specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the effect data storage capacity from being excessively increased.

The game machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Advantageous state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
A notice production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice production (pseudo continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (big hit game state) will be achieved.
A suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for making a setting suggestion;
Specific effect control means capable of executing the specific effect (divided effect) that updates the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updates the second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display ( And a production control CPU 120),
The notice production control means (production control CPU 120) is a pseudo suggestion of the display result of the change display determined in the change start time production determination process corresponding to the first display (first production image 27TM100). Continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach) and notice production corresponding to the second display (second production image 27TM200) (pseudo continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach as an image in the movie) can be executed. Yes,
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the suggestion effect corresponding to the second display (in the second effect image display area 27TM200A in which the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed, it corresponds to the variation pattern. The specified movie will be played, and the setting suggestion effect will not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by restricting the suggestive effect corresponding to the second display, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the suggestive effect, and improve the interest of the suggestive effect. ..

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The notice production control means (production control CPU 120) has a form of notice production corresponding to the first display (first production image 27TM100) and a notice production corresponding to the second display (second production image 27TM200). It is possible to change the mode (the number of times the pseudo continuous production is executed (2 times and 1 time), the mode of the cut-in image (“great chance!!” and “chance!”), and appearance during super reach. Characters to do (Character B and Character A)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect.

The game machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
With the end of the specific effect, the specific effect control unit (effect control CPU 120) ends the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other (for the divided effect). Even after the end, common with the effect information (the image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) and the four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the division effect. Production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, even after the specific effect is finished, the update of either the first display or the second display is continued, so that the interest of continuing the update of the display is played. Can be felt by the person.

The game machine of means A4,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A3,
The suggestive effect is a first suggestive effect (first setting suggestive effect) in which the display ratio of the special display (combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] minislot symbols) is different according to the set value. Including,
The gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused with the execution of the first suggestive effect.

The game machine of means A5,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4,
The suggestive effect includes a second suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) that suggests a specific setting value (setting value is “6”),
The game machine characterized in that the suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 confirmation effect)) corresponding to the second display.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused with the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The game machine of means A6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A5,
A movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable object (movable object 27TM600);
An operation promotion display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350) for prompting an operation,
The operation unit (push button 31B) is provided with an operation unit control unit (production control CPU 120) capable of operating in an operation promoting mode (flashing mode).
The operation promotion display means (production control CPU 120) has an operation promotion display corresponding to the first display (operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17(9)) and an operation promotion display corresponding to the second display. (Operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed,
The operation unit control means (production control CPU 120) does not set the operation unit to the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), a divided effect is executed). In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light off mode))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means A7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A6,
A production device that is operable when the specific production is not being executed and is inoperative when the specific production is being executed (in the case of a variation pattern that does not involve divisional production, a mode of the push button 31B) It is possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the effect, but in the case of the variation pattern involving the divided effect, it is not possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the mode of the push button 31B).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means A8,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7,
A movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable object (movable object 27TM600);
A related information display control unit (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying related information (pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect,
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable object effect when the specific effect is being executed,
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16(4), when the divided effect is being executed, the pseudo-relationship is performed. In response to the execution of the effect [Y: strong], the pseudo effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable object effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means A9,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A8,
A display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying parallax images (stereoscopic images) in which right-eye images and left-eye images are alternately arranged in the horizontal direction, and a left eye of a player provided in front of the display body And a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for blocking the visual recognition of the right-eye image by the player and the visual recognition of the left-eye image by the player's right eye, and an image display unit (production control CPU 120). ,
The image display unit (display control unit 123) limits the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (the stereoscopic image is not displayed when the division effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means A10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A9,
Corresponding display control means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
Change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) for changing the display mode of the correspondence display,
The correspondence display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the correspondence display in an area (first reserved display area 27TM011, active display area 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display,
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (changes the display mode of the hold display and the active display when the division effect is being executed). I try not to let it)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific effect.

The game machine of means A11 is
The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A10,
The notice production control unit (production control CPU 120) has a first notice production (one pseudo continuous production) as the notice production and a second control in which the advantageous state is controlled to be higher than the first notice production. It is possible to execute a notice production (two simulated productions),
The specific effect control unit (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect). Continue updating image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the second display (second effect image having a short display period). The first effect image 27TM100, which has a longer display period, has a higher proportion of effect information having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the 27TM200).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player comes to have an expectation that the one in which the second notice effect is being executed is the first display, and that the update is continued even after the end of the particular effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

The game machine of means A12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A11,
A variable display means (CPU 103) for performing variable display (variable display) based on the variable display pattern (variable pattern),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to a variable display pattern (variable pattern), and the timing for ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized by being set to any one of a plurality of finish timings (timing TA1 and timing TA2 as shown in FIG. 10-8).
With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern accompanied by a specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the effect data storage capacity from being excessively increased.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-196126 (FIG. 23), the effect display area of the image display device includes a first effect display area and a second effect display area, and a display area of the first effect display area. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of changing the ratio of the display area of the second effect display area. In a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that changes the display mode of the effect display area as described in JP-A-2017-196126 (FIG. 23), there is room for improving the interest of the effect. The configurations related to the means C1 to means C14 described below are made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and to improve the interest of the production in the gaming machine capable of executing the production that changes the display mode of the production display area. To aim.

The gaming machine of means C1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including an image display device (image display device 5) capable of displaying an effect image (image IM),
A three-dimensional object (object OB) is placed in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space), and an image of the three-dimensional object (object OB) viewed from a specific viewpoint is perspective projected. An image generation unit (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) for generating an effect image (image IM) by drawing with
The image generation means (VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123)
A predetermined image (effect image EG) imitating the effect display area (effect display area 27TM005A) of the image display apparatus (image display apparatus 5) and a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space). A predetermined process (combining process) for associating with the generated three-dimensional object (object OB),
The three-dimensional object (object OB) that has been subjected to the predetermined processing (composite processing) is changed (deformed or moved), and an image when the three-dimensional object after the change is viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) is displayed. A gaming machine, which draws by perspective projection to generate an effect image (image IM).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The predetermined image (effect image EG) includes update information (first effect information, second effect information) to be updated, and is used as an effect image (image IM) without performing the predetermined process (synthesis process). Can be displayed on the image display device (image display device 5),
The image generation unit (VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123) uses the three-dimensional object (object OB) arranged in the virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space) as the predetermined process (composite process). ) Is subjected to texture mapping based on the predetermined image (effect image EG), the three-dimensional object subjected to the texture mapping is changed (deformed or moved), and the three-dimensional object (object A gaming machine characterized in that an image when OB) is viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) is drawn by perspective projection to regenerate an effect image (image IM).
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the image generating means.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Advantageous state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
A notice production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice production (pseudo continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (big hit game state) will be achieved.
A suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for making a setting suggestion;
Specific effect control means capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating the second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display ( A CPU 120) for effect control, and a gaming machine.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the gaming machine that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values.

The game machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine of means C3,
The notice production control means (production control CPU 120) has a form of notice production corresponding to the first display (first production image 27TM100) and a notice production corresponding to the second display (second production image 27TM200). It is possible to change the mode (the number of times the pseudo continuous production is executed (2 times and 1 time), the mode of the cut-in image (“great chance!!” and “chance!”), and appearance during super reach. Characters to do (Character B and Character A)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect.

The game machine of means C5 is
A gaming machine of means C3 or means C4,
With the end of the specific effect, the specific effect control unit (effect control CPU 120) ends the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other (for the divided effect). Even after the end, common with the effect information (the image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) and the four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the division effect. Production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, even after the specific effect is finished, the update of either the first display or the second display is continued, so that the interest of continuing the update of the display is played. Can be felt by the person.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to C5,
The suggestive effect is a first suggestive effect (first setting suggestive effect) in which the display ratio of the special display (combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] minislot symbols) is different according to the set value. Including,
The gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused with the execution of the first suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of the means C3 to the means C6,
The suggestive effect includes a second suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) that suggests a specific setting value (setting value is “6”),
The game machine characterized in that the suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 confirmation effect)) corresponding to the second display.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused with the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The game machine of means C8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to C7,
A movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable object (movable object 27TM600);
An operation promotion display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350) for prompting an operation,
The operation unit (push button 31B) is provided with an operation unit control unit (production control CPU 120) capable of operating in an operation promoting mode (flashing mode).
The operation promotion display means (production control CPU 120) has an operation promotion display corresponding to the first display (operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17(9)) and an operation promotion display corresponding to the second display. (Operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed,
The operation unit control means (production control CPU 120) does not set the operation unit to the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), a divided effect is executed). In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light off mode))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to C8,
A production device that is operable when the specific production is not being executed and is inoperative when the specific production is being executed (in the case of a variation pattern that does not involve divisional production, a mode of the push button 31B) It is possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the effect, but in the case of the variation pattern involving the divided effect, it is not possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the mode of the push button 31B).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means C10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of the means C3 to the means C9,
A movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable object (movable object 27TM600);
A related information display control unit (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying related information (pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect,
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable object effect when the specific effect is being executed,
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16(4), when the divided effect is being executed, the pseudo-relationship is performed. In response to the execution of the effect [Y: strong], the pseudo effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable object effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The game machine of means C11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to C10,
A display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying parallax images (stereoscopic images) in which right-eye images and left-eye images are alternately arranged in the horizontal direction, and a left eye of a player provided in front of the display body And a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for blocking the visual recognition of the right-eye image by the player and the visual recognition of the left-eye image by the player's right eye, and an image display unit (production control CPU 120). ,
The image display unit (display control unit 123) limits the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (the stereoscopic image is not displayed when the division effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means C12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to C11,
Corresponding display control means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
Change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) for changing the display mode of the correspondence display,
The correspondence display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the correspondence display in an area (first reserved display area 27TM011, active display area 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display,
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (changes the display mode of the hold display and the active display when the division effect is being executed). I try not to let it)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means C13 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to C12,
The notice production control unit (production control CPU 120) has a first notice production (one pseudo continuous production) as the notice production and a second control in which the advantageous state is controlled to be higher than the first notice production. It is possible to execute a notice production (two simulated productions),
The specific effect control unit (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect). Continue updating image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the second display (second effect image having a short display period). The first effect image 27TM100, which has a longer display period, has a higher proportion of effect information having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the 27TM200).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player comes to have an expectation that the one in which the second notice effect is being executed is the first display, and that the update is continued even after the end of the particular effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of means C14 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to C13,
A variable display means (CPU 103) for performing variable display (variable display) based on the variable display pattern (variable pattern),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to a variable display pattern (variable pattern), and the timing for ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized by being set to any one of a plurality of finish timings (timing TA1 and timing TA2 as shown in FIG. 10-8).
With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern accompanied by a specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the effect data storage capacity from being excessively increased.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of setting suggestion production, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production mode of setting suggestion production. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notification when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the setting value is determined, and (2) is a control diagram when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each display information displayed on an image display apparatus. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the change production decision processing which is executed at the time of starting winning a prize. (A) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining a final display mode of active display, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining a change pattern of active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of a hold display. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the production decision processing which is executed when fluctuation starts. (G) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion, and (H1) and (H2) are expectation degree notices used when executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing a table for deciding whether execution of production is performed, and (I1) and (I2) for deciding whether execution of anticipation notice production is used, which is used when the first setting suggestion production is not executed. It is an explanatory view showing a table of, and (J) is an explanatory view showing a table for deciding an effect mode of the second change effect. (K) is an explanatory view showing a winning combination determination effect determination table used when executing the first setting suggestion effect, and (L) is used when not executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing a winning combination determination effect formation table, (M) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. It is a time chart showing execution timings of various effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of mini reel information. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production information in divided production. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding divided production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the movie A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the movie B. It is a time chart which shows the reproduction end timing of each movie. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding a pseudo continuous production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production determination processing at the time of a change start in a 1st embodiment. (A) is an explanatory view showing the execution presence/absence determination table of the third setting suggestive effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the execution presence/absence determination table of the fourth setting suggestive effect, and (C) is a cut-in notice effect FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution presence/absence determination table of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode concerning the 3rd setting suggestion production, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode concerning the 4th setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|generation aspect regarding the cut-in notice production. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the change start time production determination processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution presence determination table of 5th setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 5th setting suggestion production. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows a display control part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drawing method of three-dimensional image processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of synthetic processing of the production image and the object. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change which rotates the object after a synthetic|combination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a viewpoint and an object in a virtual three-dimensional space. It is a screen figure which shows the display mode of the image and background image projected on a virtual screen.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right hitting display device 26 is provided for urging a right hitting operation to perform a firing operation aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area for displaying a suspension display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. Region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handing notification LED 37 for urging a right-handing operation is provided. The right-handing notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2 ).

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. To display the first number of reserved memories, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that a game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. Has been done. Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the game ball is operated to shoot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). The game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when the operation is performed.

In this example, the row of nails 19 is provided, so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the player makes a left-handed operation. I can't stop. For example, the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, so that the game ball may be allowed to enter the first starting winning opening only when a left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be formed. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area and the row of nails 19 may be provided to allow the game ball to enter the first start winning opening only when the left hitting operation is performed.

On the right side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction to move the bottom surface. The game ball is changed to an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening located below the member and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 7 is a jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the bottom member is moved forward. From the closed state, which is moved forward toward the bottom, the bottom member is moved backward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port, as shown in FIG. As shown in, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. By moving the ball back and forth, a special winning opening or a second starting winning opening located below the bottom member allows the game ball to win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and the game ball cannot win a prize. Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state in which the forward movement is performed forward, the bottom member is moved backward in the backward direction, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is moved from the upper left to the lower right, and drops onto the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are variable. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special winning ball device 6B. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped to the second starting winning port is a special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared with the case without the restriction piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is the special variable winning ball device. Since the game balls flow toward the 17, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side in this sense. Can be said.

Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball into the special winning opening to get the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Inside the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball to the special winning opening to get the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Further, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball winning in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole). Is provided to the right of the game area, so when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area to perform a firing operation (so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending storages, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, since the big hit game state is entered based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the pass gate 41, the pass gate 41 also serves as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that has both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper and left positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect frame LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. ..

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a shooting operation (so-called left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player makes a left-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player, and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

It should be noted that, when the game ball enters (start winning) the starting winning opening during the period during which the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (a start prize has occurred, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it is a "big hit" symbol. .. Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" is indicated. Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and the small hit symbol may be "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" category is set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) are prepared. The jackpot type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is finished, it may be controlled to a certain variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, the KT control that is more likely to make a small hit than in the normal state is executed. With this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the big hitting game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special map variation time (the period during which the special map changes) is shortened compared to the normal state (time saving state) is executed, and it is called "Public hit" in the normal figure game. By increasing the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, the control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

The probability change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has started is established first. To do. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (probability of number cutting, etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a probability variation state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of being controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after power-on, for example, when the system is reset) It is in a state of being.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player makes a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player and the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general-purpose game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot execute the general-purpose game based on the passage immediately) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning a prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) as a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the "small hit" symbol is obtained. Also, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "missing symbol" is generated.

After the display result of the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. Note that, similar to the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed).

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the point of the frame LED 9 is used. It may be performed by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing at which the display result (also called the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later, the decorative design not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which is continued.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are displayed together and stopped, and after the jackpot gaming state is terminated, it is changed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation pattern (normal pattern). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, the fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5” etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state) and when "small hit". The common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach miss”) (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative design may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit midfield effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit midfield effect, an effect that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion effect that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. Incidentally, during the small hit game state, some big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, big hit type that makes the subsequent game state a highly accurate state) big hit game By executing a common effect in the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-precision state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, and a power supply board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch (first counting switch 23 and second counting switch 24). )) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 by taking in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on). By the transmission of the detection signal, passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, the solenoid 83, etc.) for the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric auditors or the special winning opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the special winning opening solenoid 83.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), command for specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further outputs a sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image, and turns on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37. Therefore, the sound control signal (a signal that specifies a sound to be output) is voice-controlled. The LED signal is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal designating the lighting/lighting-out mode of the LED) is supplied to the LED control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-hand strike notification LED 37 are turned on/off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and turning on/off of the LED.

The CPU 120 for effect control executes audio output, control of turning on/off the LED (supply of sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the LED control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 102 accessible settings, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the first special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. (See below for details). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the second special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. It In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “universal hit”. The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure patterns.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt processing, a test terminal is a processing for outputting a test signal for making it possible to confirm the control state of the gaming machine outside the gaming machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that the right-handed operation is being performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during a big hit game, a small hit game based on a variation display of the second special symbol, and a KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right-handed test signal during the small hitting game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process processing. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning a prize determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning a prize in the first starting prize hole, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When the start winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information in the first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. To be done. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process processing is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning a prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S121A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit". In this case, the jackpot type is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In the first variation pattern setting process, a random number value for determining the variation pattern is used to determine a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes a process of determining which one. In the first fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether there is reach, etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". In this first special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary is measured. It includes processing to do. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process ends. To do.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A), the first When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol and be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit). Pre-opening process-determines whether or not the value corresponding to the second small hit end processing), if the small hit game is during, the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation processing Do not change from the value, and if it is not a small hit game, it is possible to update the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation of the first special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal state, if configured to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stop of swinging of the decorative pattern and the like, which results in a discomfort to the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the short hitting ending period be shorter than that in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of configuring as described above, for example, in the first KT state, since the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is produced, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and an effect for emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be made longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period, the length of the period may be changed depending on the gaming state similarly to the above small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, to stop the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, to stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol It includes the process of setting. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". If the display result is "miss", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the cut-out is completed. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The first gate passage waiting process of step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special process flag is "4". In the first gate passage waiting process, control for waiting passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first jackpot opening preprocessing of step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "5". In this first jackpot opening preprocessing, processing for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the jackpot opening state based on that the display result is "jackpot" It is included. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The first big hit opening process of step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "6". This first big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. , And a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7". Then, the process during the opening of the first big hit ends.

The first jackpot opening post-processing of step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "7". The first big hit post-opening process is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and a big hit when the upper limit number of executions is reached. It includes processing for making settings for ending the gaming state. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the first special feature process flag is updated. The value of the figure process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the first jackpot opening post-processing is ended.

The first jackpot ending process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "8". This first big hit ending process corresponds to the process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or the end of the big hit game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting the probability variation control, the KT control, and the high base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first big hit ending process ends.

The first small hit opening pre-processing of step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "9". The first small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". .. At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hitting opening pretreatment ends.

The first small hitting open process in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "10". In the first small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the special winning opening, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the like. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state to reach the end timing of the small hitting game state, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11", and the first small hitting opening process is ended.

The first small hitting end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "11". The first small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small hitting end processing is ended.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. In addition, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol variation process to change the second special symbol. When it is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit). Pre-opening process to determine whether the value is equivalent to the first small hit end process), if the small hit game is during, the value of the second special figure process flag corresponds to the second special symbol variation process Do not change from the value, and if it is not a small hit game, it is possible to update the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Incidentally, also for the small hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period may be changed depending on the game state.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, control for performing a predetermined operation confirmation, and other controls for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, an operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and driving of the movable body 32. Controls for operating various effect devices such as actions are performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of the winning prize transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voices or sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and sending commands (lighting signals) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command for designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "miss". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Also, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 designating termination of the small hitting game state, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit mid-game production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of end effect effect control at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game medium is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a production control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 8-1. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, on the main board 11, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 8-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 21TM201, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Various circuits for controlling are installed. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a setting function of random numbers used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20 It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays various winning information regarding winning. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 8A is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided at the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is a front surface when visually recognized, and is different from the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with respective winning openings (large winning openings, second starting winning openings, first starting winning openings, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter referred to as "entry area". (Also referred to as) the number of game balls that have entered the game ball, and various winning information such as continuous ratios and winning ratios is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. This allows you to check various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening (pass the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when performing the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment was made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and set values such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit, which will be described later, are changed on the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 that functions as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. A clerk of the amusement hall operates the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like are predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and initialization processing (RAM clear) described later is performed. To be executed. By disposing the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but can execute the switching operation and execute an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk at the game hall. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to retrieve the key, so that the store clerk or the like in the amusement park leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3, in the lower portion of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming balls that have won the winning holes and the gaming balls that have entered the outlets to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been launched) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the frame LED 9 and the decoration. It includes an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the application LED.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 8-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor that detects opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered is connected, and various abnormalities are generated based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates a ball burnout state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting launcher. Output full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Which is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) a signal through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. For confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted/received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (the prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the award ball request signal from the game controlling microcomputer 100, transmits to the game controlling microcomputer 100 a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying that. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted at the timing of transmitting/receiving the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the award ball request signal, and the prize having the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the prize ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and sets the received ACK signal with the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. Also, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, ball out, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting concerned is set. The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives, through the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lent balls on a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). Output (including and) to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on/off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-sphere LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lendable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendability display signal to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted/received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 8-2.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of lending balls. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the 24 V AC power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 stages from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

8A to 8F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases in which the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the determination value to be a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display. If the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", it will win the jackpot with a lower probability (1/300). ing. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". There is a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases to win the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, It is designed to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is designed to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is designed to win the big hit with the same probability (1/235) as when targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is designed to win the big hit with the same probability (1/220) as when targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot winning is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F). It is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state is finished, according to the specified setting value. FIGS. 8-5(1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestive effects. 8-5(1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the big hit ending screen, and in FIG. 8-5(2), the ending screen in the "cloudy" form is selected on the big hit ending screen. For example, FIG. 8-5(3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 8-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot gaming state is over, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command for executing an ending production in the image display device 5 to the production control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can store the setting value designated by the received setting command in the RAM 102, and determine the ending effect mode based on the stored setting value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot gaming state is finished, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character (character of "BONUS end") informing that the jackpot gaming state is ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (a clear mode, a cloudy mode, a rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 8-5(4), the setting values designated by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When setting the mode of the setting suggestive effect to the "clear" mode shown in FIG. 8-5(1), when determining to the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 8-5(2), and in FIG. In the case of determining the "rain" mode shown in 5(3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests a "fine" mode setting shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It was decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 40%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has a low rate (for example, 20%) of the “clear” mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and the medium degree. It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high rate (for example, 50%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%).

In this way, by varying the determination rate of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect to be done.

(Process at power-on)
Next, the power-on process will be described.
8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). In this process, a parity check is performed as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0-5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the set values stored in the set value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as normal values, and six-stage set values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above, and the setting value 4 in this example is described above. 8-4 and so on, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 and shown in FIG. 8-4.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the gaming hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is set in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a normal value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the setting change mode described later is entered (step S21TM4580), and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is determined to be executed, and when the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is performed. It has been done. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at power restoration is 0 (initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified on the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are detected. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( If NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the setting value is changed and/or Or, it becomes possible to confirm. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is set? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

In the present embodiment, in order to bring the setting value into a state in which the setting value cannot be changed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) on the condition that the setting has been performed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or is somehow illegal. There is a possibility that the setting value is being confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. The control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 described later is performed. Move on to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 determines that , And proceeds to step S21TM4120. If it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set in the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030) (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Will be controlled by the mode. Further, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. If the setting change mode was controlled when the power was cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 is executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), in the step S21TM4140, when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state In (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing of step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control.

Upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message "Setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055) and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). Then, a notification prompting the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (fixing the set value) is performed. For example, the message "Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after turning off the power" is displayed. It should be noted that similar notification may be performed by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200) and then displays the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, whereby "the set value is not a regular value (0 to 5)". Despite that there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all of which are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered." Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a calling lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine). To be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. A weight of 4 ms is provided to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. The security signal is continuously output during the loop processing. By outputting the security signal externally, in an external device such as a hall computer, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0-5 It is possible that the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered)) may occur.

The loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 will be continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and if the power is cut off during setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when YES is determined in step S21TM4030), in any of the cases, the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state in order to bring the setting value into a changeable state (setting change mode). (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the state in which the set value can be changed ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the setting value is not permitted, so that the setting value of the setting value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process moves to the above-described loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the game player cannot shift to the normal game process. Therefore, the clerk or the like in the game arcade must turn off the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turn it on again. I won't. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is temporarily turned off so that all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 presets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not permitted to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), two conditions are required.

However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even if the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It will be controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the processing of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When the regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as the regular value in the setting value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power-off process after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure or the like is input. Immediately before the power supply stops operating due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off processing, the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area.

Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repeated processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the repeated processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed), the power supply When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the clerk of the amusement hall normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the amusement hall actually uses it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the setting value of. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area+1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode is controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting change flag indicating that there is a possibility of being set is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the control is in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has transitioned to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off last time) is 3 If there is, the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 responds. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and send the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the setting value update (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

In addition, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the setting value can be updated (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processing from step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). Since the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process shifts to the normal game process thereafter. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and when the time reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are confirmed. Corresponding to the end of control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process (without (without). Further, the processing for setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determine which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. The control load can be reduced.

Also, output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, a common value (1000 ms) is set for the security signal when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The timer is set. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case of being controlled to the setting change mode and the case of being controlled to the setting change mode, which mode is set on the external device side. It will be difficult to know if it was controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is temporarily sent in step S21TM4710. After the timer value is set to 1000 ms, the security signal timer value is reset (overwritten) to 30000 ms in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. 1 sec has passed, and when the setting change mode has been controlled, 30 sec has passed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM clear is not performed and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt permission is given. In the process (for example, the information output process), the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (when the RAM clear is performed, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt permission. The security signal will continue to be output until. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process. ) To 0 ms, the security signal may be continuously output, and the game control timer interrupt process may be performed after the security signal is output.

As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is changed to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control of the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, the output period of the security signal can be made different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled, while the output control of the security signal is made common.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to know whether the initialization processing has been executed and the setting confirmation mode has been executed or the initialization processing has been executed and the settings have been changed. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial state can be specified. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion processing has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

Note that the security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the abnormality detection flag being set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, and therefore the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output process. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the lapse of 1 second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear will be executed, so the error detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power failure occurs). At some point, it is unclear whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds elapse (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and is first set after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. The value of the security signal timer set to 1 may be at least a period during which the output of the security signal can be recognized by the external device side, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the processing of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, when the power is cut off after the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the range of setting values as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is directly displayed as an image on the CPU 120 side for effect control. If it is displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) designated by the setting command is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 is set. The effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the CPU 120 side for effect control, the setting value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is, or an effect indicating the setting value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it becomes unnecessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing for the set value designated by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot gaming state ends, according to the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). It is determined to be YES in S21TM4020, the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040). Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the processing at the time of power interruption recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt permission, the game control timer interrupt process (special (Including pattern process processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0. Without executing the clear, the backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power-off recovery, and the normal game process is started.

In the production control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), restoration from power failure is performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed. Be recognized). When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 has been restored from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply was stopped. It is possible to notify that (RAM clear has not been performed).

On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the processing at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer, and the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal at power-on. , After the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process) may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

The reason why the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a normal value is set in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. If it is stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) the setting change mode is controlled, the value in the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the setting change mode is in progress. This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the process of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the production control CPU 120, the initialization processing is performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without recovery from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Be recognized). Upon receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the game state or the like in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 (data when power supply is stopped). Based on the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM clear has been performed without recovery from power failure.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. When the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Value), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-mentioned step S21TM4710, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt permission (information output process), After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with the random number circuit setting program to make settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to the normal game process capable of executing the game control timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit and a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating the random number for determining whether or not to win the normal symbol. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process to perform, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol per determination random number is one round (normal symbol per determination random number When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the power-off recovery process, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. When it is determined to be 0 (YES), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (depending on the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. ), and the process at the time of power failure recovery may be performed.

Further, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame. 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, the clerk or the like of the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Also, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also the gaming state and the like. Can be prevented from being initialized (NO in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 to set the RAM clear flag to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state or the like. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting value was unstable because it was controlled to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the set value that the game hall is trying to confirm is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and the game is stopped without shifting to the normal game process (step S21). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 are controllable, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stopped state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, the game is prevented from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in the state where the set value is unstable, and the power is supplied when the power is turned on. It is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled in the setting change mode when the disconnection occurred.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 sets the condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) ( When all of the steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) and the display monitor in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the letter "E" is displayed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D forming the display monitor 21TM029 display the letter “E” respectively, so that the clerk at the amusement hall has an abnormality (in the setting change mode). There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off under control). In addition, the production control CPU 120, which has received the setting value error command, causes the image display device 5 to display a message “Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off”. After turning the power off (power switch 21TM055 is OFF), the store clerk, etc., shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (power switch 21TM055 is ON), and changes the set value. Perform a notification to urge (confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned off and then turned on again”). Please move to the setting change mode”) will not be performed.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, a message "in the setting change mode" or a message "Please perform the setting change operation to change the set value" can be displayed on the image display device 5. With this, the clerk at the amusement hall can understand that the setting change mode is being controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area After changing to the planned setting value, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the setting value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any one of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is not controlled to the setting change mode but is controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190). .. As a result, an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power is turned on again after power is turned off." To change to the setting change mode").

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power off”). Please change to the setting change mode”) is also performed, and as a state of the gaming machine, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the condition for changing to the setting change mode after the power is restored is It will be notified that it is not established. In this case, the clerk at the game hall understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

Thus, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error is displayed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029). This automatically shifts to the setting change mode without prompting the user to avoid unnecessary error display and promptly change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied at the time of power restoration (b), even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode, it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode at the time of power restoration. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on display monitor 21TM029). Will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i )-(Iii) is not established, a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the setting change mode is entered (or the transition condition is established). The CPU 120 for effect control, which has transmitted the command indicating that the command has been received, displays the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled in the setting change mode" It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process is shifted to the normal game process, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. In response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a lock switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting change switch operation command. Even if there is not, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "Operation of the setting changeover switch is detected." is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed despite being controlled by neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, and thus illegal It is possible to check whether or not

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting change switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modification of power-on process)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without checking whether or not the condition is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 8-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. If YES (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The process is controlled (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), which is different from the process shown in FIG. 8-6. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. Is set, and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting change mode is controlled based on the three conditions being satisfied (NO in step S21TM4570). However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) are set. Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

As described above, when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are determined based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, it is possible to improve workability for fixing the set value.

Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (ii) even if the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied, the setting is performed. It will be controlled in the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to step S21TM4620 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation once changes the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). While making different, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode, It is arranged to appropriately shift to the normal game processing.

Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) and the setting change mode is controlled, a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be issued. good. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits the setting value error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Performing the corresponding processing), the CPU 120 for effect control, which has received the setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110), says, "Please turn on the lock switch once and then turn it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the gaming machine maker sets the flag during setting change in advance before shipping the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), the gaming hall then goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Accordingly, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and to take a measure to fix the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the range of random numbers determined as a big hit differs depending on the set value. For example, the big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning before the setting change, the event that is determined to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before the change, but is out of relation to the setting value after the change, On the contrary, there may occur a phenomenon in which it is judged as a big hit in relation to the set value before the change, but it is judged as a big hit in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, based on the big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning before the setting change, continue the game after the setting change (execute the game control timer interrupt process including the special symbol process process) Since that is inappropriate, by clearing the pending memory (special symbol pending memory, normal symbol pending memory) by initializing the game state, the number of pending memories is set to the initial value (0). There is.

Further, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, as a result of not permitting the interrupt in step S21TM1540, the switch process in the game control timer interrupt process (step S21 shown in FIG. 4) is not performed either. , Starting prizes and passing gates are invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not yet been executed and the random numbers have not been updated while the setting change mode is being controlled. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, the random number will be the same regardless of the timing of the starting winning, and the game will be played based on such a random number. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, starting prizes and passing through the gate are invalidated.

(Set value storage control when power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when the power is cut off during the change of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12(1).

As shown in the order 1, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) when the power is turned on, and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read set value is set to 1 "1", which is obtained by adding, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “1” to “1”, and “2” obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “2” to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state where the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to be controlled in the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power supply was cut off in the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

When the power is turned on in the order 6, the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the control shown in FIG. 8-11 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

In this way, when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without terminating the setting change mode), when the power is restored. The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the preset setting value may have already been set, and in this case, the clerk at the amusement arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing a new operation to change the setting value. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to the normal game processing, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by changing the setting value during the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

The order 1 to the order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the confirmed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power switch 21TM055 is turned off, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to be controlled to the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is cut off, , Valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area when power is restored).

It is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is set when the setting change mode is controlled. When the 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the operation for ending the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (overwritten) to confirm the setting value based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in response to the change of the set value stored in.

With this configuration, even if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the power is cut off without completing the operation for ending the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is set to the power supply. It has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and for a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting values. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting values (for example, for all of the setting values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to a gaming machine (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

Further, the present invention disclosed in the following is disclosed in the characteristic portion 21TM.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. Further, as disclosed in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technology of the conventional game machine described in JP-A-2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. is there. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 having different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650),
Specific signal output means (a game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
And a setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (value of the security signal timer) relating to the period during which the specific signal is output,
The setting means can set a common predetermined value when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (step S21TM4710 sets 1 second as the value of the security signal timer). ),
The specific signal output means outputs the specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). Upon completion, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second has passed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and at the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode. Do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Equipped with initialization means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode),
The setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value after setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as a value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until the period corresponding to the specific value has passed (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value regardless of whether the control of the setting change mode is ended or the control of the setting confirmation mode is ended. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting unit is made common and different output is made in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) In the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing the specific information (setting change flag), the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on that, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620),
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and also to send an error command to the effect control means (step S21TM4190 transmits a set value abnormality error command, and a display monitor on the error display of step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please transfer it" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention according to means P1 to means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To provide.

The game machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 having different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case), an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means is such that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (at the time of power-on, in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, shift to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. Can prompt change.

The game machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine having means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to carry out the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is turned on (one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). If NO is determined in step ), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in the state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620),
And the specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and to send an error command to the effect control means (a setting value abnormality error command is sent at step S21TM4190, and is displayed in the error display at step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please transfer it" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The inventions relating to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 having different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (setting change flag in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). When it is determined that it is set), it controls to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting switch) Automatically controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the 21TM052 is ON is satisfied.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150). The game control microcomputer 100 for executing the clear (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The game machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). If the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied) (Automatically controls the setting change mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power is cut off during the control of the setting change mode, the setting information is stored in the setting change mode even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, because the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the game machine is started, the transition operation (when the power supply is turned on, the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), and the condition for transitioning to the setting change mode is satisfied), it is possible to control the setting change mode, and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to end the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when being controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. Based on the above, the specific information is erased when the setting change mode ends (the setting change flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends),
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the shift operation is performed, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the condition for changing to the setting change mode is satisfied, The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let)
It is characterized by
According to this, the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting value) for storing the setting value (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to the set value stored in the set value storage means,
The setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the changing operation when the setting changing mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). End the setting change mode based on
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when being controlled in the setting change mode. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored. Since the set value stored in is changed, the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off in the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting change mode before the power outage is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The game machine of means Q5
Any of the gaming machines selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting value) for storing the setting value (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to the set value stored in the set value storage means,
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation when being controlled in the setting change mode and the setting value storage area when the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. Change only the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing set value) and change the set value stored in the set value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting change mode is ended (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and end the setting change mode),
The set value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value before being stored is stored (even if the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area itself is stored. Is not changed, so if the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the set value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 16TM]
Next, the characteristic unit 16TM will be described. 9-1 (A1) and (B1) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the hold display and the active display in the present embodiment. The hold display is display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol which is not executed, and the active display is the display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol which is being executed. In the present embodiment, a first hold display area 16TM011 in which the first hold storage number (first hold display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is displayed is provided in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. An active display area 16TM013 for displaying the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is provided at the lower center of the screen of FIG.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to a low-probability low base state (normal state), in a special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003 at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, a mini-projection described later. Slot 16TM030 is displayed. In this example, since the minislot 16TM030 is displayed immediately below the active display 16TM003, the player can see the minislot 16TM030 as if it were the base of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the minislot 16TM030 is displayed at a position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily understand that the minislot 16TM030 executes an effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. You can

In the present embodiment, the minislot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed), and also regardless of the number of reserved memories. Information.

When the first reserved storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reserved display 16TM001 in the first reserved display area 16TM011 as many as the first reserved storage number. That is, the first hold display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning hole) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, is controlled to the big hit game state) Not, and, the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display region 16TM011, the first hold display 16TM001 is dealt with in the order close to the active display region 16TM013 (from the right as seen by the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. In other words, the active display 16TM003 is a big hit game in which the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed after the start condition (for example, the winning at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) for which the state is not controlled and the number of pending storage is not 0).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the area in the upper center of the image display device 5 in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed and stopped is displayed from the left, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, It is the symbol display area 5R.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the special symbols are displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5, which are smaller than the decorative symbols, and the special symbols are variably displayed. A symbol showing whether or not it is displayed and the display result of the special symbol is referred to as a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, the small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped, the area in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5, from the left, the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, the small symbol display area. 5r. The small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r have a smaller display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small design is lower than the visibility of the decorative design.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), in the present embodiment, the mini slot in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5 when controlled to the low accurate low base state (normal state). 16TM030 is displayed. In the minislot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of minislot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display described later, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), mini-slots of “replay”, “bell”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “7”, and “blank” are displayed. The symbols are variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variable display described later, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), the symbol in which the notice character is not displayed (“no display”), and the jackpot expectation degree are displayed. Mini-slot patterns of "CHANCE", "intense heat", and "FEVER", which are symbols composed of the hint characters that are suggested, are variably displayed.

(First mini slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A1), in the present embodiment, when the low-probability low base state (normal state) is controlled, a variable display of special symbols (variable display of decorative symbols, variation of small symbols) Each time (display) is executed, the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (areas corresponding to each of the three reels in the slot machine) are divided into three areas, "left", "middle", and "right". ), it is possible to execute the first minislot variable display in which the minislot symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertical scrolling display and update display). In the first mini-slot variable display, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one row (one line). In the following description, when simply referred to as “variable display”, it means a variable display of a special symbol, or a variable display of a decorative symbol or a variable display of a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), in each minislot symbol display area of the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels), "replay", "bell", "watermelon", A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “cherry”, “7”, and “blank (in this example, a horizontal linear object (−)”) are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the minislot symbols are stopped in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, when a combination of symbols called a winning symbol combination is completed, the winning symbol is realized as the winning symbol is achieved. The winning combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The winning combination in the present embodiment is a combination including the same symbol and a different symbol. In the case of a combination of different symbols, the winning combination is “miss”.

In the present embodiment, the combination is achieved when the combination of the same symbols is completed. For example, when a combination of the same symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] is prepared in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of “Bell” is achieved. Similarly, when a combination of the same symbols of [Watermelon], [Watermelon], and [Watermelon] is prepared, the role of “Watermelon” is achieved, and when a combination of the same symbols of [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry] is prepared, The role of "cherry" is established, and when the combination of the same symbols [7], [7], and [7] is complete, the combination of "7" is established. However, when the combination of the same symbols of [blank], [blank], and [blank] is aligned in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, the winning combination is treated the same as when the winning combination is “out”.

(Second mini-slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, after the first minislot variable display is executed (after any of the above-mentioned winning combinations is established), it is not divided into a plurality of sections. In the single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (area corresponding to one reel), the second mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display) can be executed. is there. In the second minislot variable display, the minislot symbols are displayed in one row (one line) in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), "no display", "CHANCE", "extraordinary heat", and "FEVER" can be distinguished from each other. A plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In the present embodiment, the display result of the second minislot variable display, that is, the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed) by the displayed characters It is suggested that is a "big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the number of times of variable display executed after the game state is controlled to the low-probability low base state (normal state) is counted. A variation display 16TM040 showing the value of the variation counter is displayed on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The value indicated by the variation display 16TM040 enables the player to know the number of variation display executed in the normal state. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), "125" is displayed as the number-of-variations display 16TM040, and the variation display has already been executed 124 times after the game state shifts to the normal state. It shows a state in which the 125th variation display is currently being executed.

Here, the number-of-variations display 16TM040 is different from the normal mode (for example, white mode) in the setting suggestive mode (from the white mode) by executing the second setting suggestive effect described later based on the set value of the gaming machine. For example, it changes to a purple mode).

In addition, the display mode of the number-of-changes display 16TM040 is different from the normal mode (for example, white mode) to the normal mode and the setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) described above based on the display result of the executed variable display. A notice effect (for example, referred to as a second expected degree notice effect) that is changed to a degree notice manner (for example, red manner) may be executed. However, in the same variable display, both the second setting suggestion effect and the second expectation notice effect are not executed, and when it is determined to execute the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is displayed in the second change suggestion effect. The expectation notice production is not executed. That is, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the second expectation notice effect.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing a change effect determination process executed at the time of winning the start prize. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning time change effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2 in the prefetching notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the start winning a prize change effect determination process, the CPU 120 for effect control first sets a set of commands at the time of a starting prize (for example, a symbol designating command, a variation category command) based on the occurrence of the starting prize to the first starting prize hole. , And a first reserved storage number addition designation command) are newly received (step S16TM1000).

The symbol designating command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not to be a big hit among the determination results at the time of winning, and the determination result of the type of big hit. CPU103, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, determines whether or not it is a jackpot, and determines the jackpot type when it is a jackpot, and designates the determination result Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern in the winning determination result. The CPU 103 determines, based on the variation pattern type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, whether or not normal reach, super reach, and the like, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. To do. Further, the first reserved storage number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved storage number has increased by one.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores a set of commands at the time of starting winning (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designating command) in the command storing area at the time of winning a prize. Is determined. If a new set of commands for starting winning is not received (NO in step S16TM1000), the process ends.

If a set of commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display as the final display mode determination table of the active display described later (see FIG. 9-3(A)). (See step S16TM1010). The final display mode of the active display determined in step S16TM1010 is merely the final display color of the active display determined at the time of winning the start prize. In the present embodiment, after the active display has changed to the final display color, the notice character may be superimposed and displayed on the active display in response to execution of the expectation notice production described later. That is, the active display mode may change from the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of winning the start prize, based on the effect determination process at the start of variation.

FIG. 9-3A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), in this embodiment, any one of a “normal mode (white mode)”, a “blue mode”, and a “red mode” is selected as the final display mode of the active display 16TM003. It is possible to determine, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects.

As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), the starting winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserved memory) becomes a normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 70% and a blue mode (blue at a rate of 25%). It becomes a red shape (red circle display) at a rate of 5%.

On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of winning the start is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), it is based on the starting prize (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is 10% in the normal mode, 30% in the blue mode, and 60% in the red mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the active display, and the presence/absence and the number of executions of the first change effect based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3(B)). (Step S16TM1020).

FIG. 9-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 001 to 025 can be determined as the change pattern of the active display, and the determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-3(B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 70% with the change pattern 001. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 25% and the change pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the memory) is selected with a probability of 10% for the change pattern 001, with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 002, and with a probability of 60% for the change pattern 003. The judgment value is assigned so that

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning occurs, but when the display mode of the active display during active shift is different from the final display mode. Will execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute the first change effect that suggests that there is a possibility of changing. There are a success mode and a failure mode in this first change effect, and in the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to the failure mode. When the first change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed. The first change effect is an effect in which the character acts on the active display. When the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the character Does affect the active display, but does not change the display mode of the active display.

The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 001 is zero. The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 002 is one, and the first change effect in the failure mode is executed. The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 003 is two, and the first change effect in the failure mode is executed in both cases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of winning the start is “out” (that is, the symbol designation) When the determination result designated by the command is “out”, the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is 30% in the change pattern 011. The change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 27%, the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 23%, the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 5%. The determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 016 is selected and the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) is selected with a probability of 5%, a change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 10%, and a change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 15%. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 011 is zero. The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 012 is one, and the first change effect in the failure mode is executed. The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 013 is two, and the first change effect in the failure mode is executed in both cases. The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 014 is one, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed. The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 015 is two, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed after the first change effect in the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 016 is two, and the first change effect in the failure mode is executed after the first change effect in the success mode is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, the symbol designation) When the determination result designated by the command is “out”, the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 35% in the change pattern 021. The change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 25%, the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the memory) is selected with a probability of 5% for the change pattern 021, with a probability of 15% for the change pattern 022, and with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 023. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 25% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 021 is zero. The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 022 is one, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 023 is two, and the first change effect in the successful mode is executed in both cases. The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 024 is two, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed after the first change effect in the failure mode is executed. The number of times the first change effect is executed in the change pattern 025 is two, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed after the first change effect in the failure mode is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change pattern determination table of the hold display (see FIGS. 9-4(C) to (F)) (step S16TM1030), and the process is performed as it is. finish.

FIG. 9-4(C) is for determining the change pattern of the hold display for one hold when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area is “1”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 101 to 103 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and the determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern 101 is 100% as the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory). The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variable display based on (memorization) so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 100%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) For the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variable display based on (memorization), the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is 100% of the change pattern 103. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) For the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variable display based on (memorization), the determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the description of FIG. 9D, the active shift means that the first hold display 16TM001 is shifted from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013 (as a result, the start winning determination is made. The active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is displayed).

In the present embodiment, the display mode is not changed when the first hold display 16TM001 is shifted from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013. That is, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 immediately before the active shift and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 immediately after the active shift match.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is not changed during the active shift, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is changed during the active shift. You may let me.

FIG. 9-4(D) is for determining the change pattern of the hold display for two holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area is “2”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 201 to 206 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 100% in the change pattern 201. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) For the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variable display based on (memorization), the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 40% of the change pattern 202. The determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) For the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 40%. There is.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is 10% in the change pattern 204. The determination values are assigned such that the probability is selected, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) As the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 204 is selected with a probability of 60%, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected in.

FIG. 9-4(E) is for determining the change pattern of the hold display for three holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area is “3”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 301 to 310 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is 100%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) For the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variable display based on (memorization), the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 20% in the change pattern 302. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 20% and the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) As the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 302 is selected with a probability of 40%, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 20%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected in.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 13% in the change pattern 305. The change pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 4%, the change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 20%. The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 310 is selected and selected with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) As the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variable display based on the memory), the change pattern 305 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 30%. , The change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 13%, and the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 4%.

FIG. 9-4(F) is for determining the change pattern of the reservation display for four reservations when the first reservation storage number stored in the first reservation storage number storage area is “4”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 401 to 415 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command) When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is 100%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) For the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variable display based on (memorization), the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is 20% in the change pattern 402. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 40%. .. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) As the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 402 is selected with a probability of 30%, the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 30%. And the determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, by the symbol designating command When the designated determination result is “out”, the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is 3% in the change pattern 406. The change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 10%. The change pattern 411 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 412 is selected with a probability of 15%, the change pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the change pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 15%. , The determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 16%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first hold) As the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory, the change pattern 406 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 10%. , The change pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 15%, the change pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 15%, the change pattern 411 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the change pattern 412 is selected with a probability of 7%. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 7%, the change pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 7%, and the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 4%.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
The CPU 103, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation command for designating the display result, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern, and the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation Command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command)
Is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved) for designating that the reserved storage number has been subtracted Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (big hit or off, big hit type in case of big hit), and variation time of special symbol and effect contents ( Reach and pseudo-relationship, etc.) variation pattern designating command that designates a set of commands, based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, variable display of special symbols is executed, and special symbols It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and effect contents (reach, pseudo-relation, etc.).

Further, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the special symbol (the first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished and the display result is derived.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variation start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-5 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. While setting a production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production) based on the command and the variation pattern designation command, a decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a first setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on a first setting suggestion effect execution presence/absence determination table (see FIG. 9-6(G)) (step S16TM2000). ..

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low accurate low base state, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect that suggests the currently set setting value. This first setting suggesting effect is to stop and display the combination of [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] minislot symbols as the same symbol combination in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the minislot 16TM030. By doing so, it is a production in which the role of "bell" is established. That is, based on the fact that the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [bell], [bell], and [bell] is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player sets the set value. Recognize that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting has been executed.

As shown in the table of FIG. 9-6(G), a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect is assigned according to the currently set setting value. When the setting value is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 97%, and determines to execute at a rate of 3%. Further, when the setting value is "2", it is determined that the first setting suggestive effect is not executed at a rate of 96%, and is executed at a rate of 4%. When the set value is "3", it is determined that the first setting suggestive effect is not executed at a rate of 95% and is executed at a rate of 5%. When the set value is "4", it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestive effect at a rate of 94%, and to execute at a rate of 6%. When the set value is "5", it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestive effect at a rate of 93%, and to execute at a rate of 7%. When the setting value is "6", it is determined that the first setting suggestive effect is not executed at a rate of 92%, and is executed at a rate of 8%.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the ratio of the first setting suggestive effect is executed. Become. In the present embodiment, since the variation start time effect determination process is executed every time variable display is executed, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display described above is [bell] or "off." As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggesting effect is executed every time the variable display is executed, and the first setting is performed with respect to the number of times the variable display is executed. The user is also interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (percentage of execution of the first setting suggestion effect). With such a configuration, the player can be made to infer the set value for each variable display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, when it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect (YES in step S16TM2010), effect control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect when executing the first setting suggestion effect. The determination is made based on the expected degree announcement performance execution determination table 1 (see (H1) and (H2) in FIG. 9-6) (step S16TM2020). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process proceeds to step S16TM2120 described below.

FIG. 9-6 (H1) shows a case where it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect, and shows an execution ratio of the expectation notice effect when the display result is “out”. The determination value for determining whether to execute the expectation notice production is assigned to each of the out-of-range variation patterns in the expectation notice production execution determination table 1. When the variation pattern is “out of reach” (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “out of normal reach” (variation time is 30 seconds), it is determined that the expectation notice production is not executed at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “out of super reach” (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 60%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 40%. To do.

FIG. 9-6 (H2) shows a case where it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect, and shows the execution ratio of the expectation notice effect when the display result is “big hit”. The determination value for determining whether or not to execute the expectation notice production is assigned to each of the jackpot variation patterns in the expectation notice notice execution table 1. When the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “super reach jackpot” (variation time is 120 seconds), it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 20%, and it is determined to be performed at a rate of 80%. To do.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2), the presence/absence of execution of the expectation notice production is determined based on the variation pattern (variation time). In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the variation pattern (variation time) has non-reach deviation (10 seconds), normal reach deviation (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). If the change pattern (variation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds), it is determined that the expectation notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. It is decided to execute at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super-reach jackpot (120 seconds), it is decided to execute an expectation notice production at a rate of 80%.

When a variation pattern with a short variation time (non-reach deviation (10 seconds), normal reach deviation (30 seconds), normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect Not enough time is secured to execute the production of. Therefore, when the variable display based on the variation pattern with a short variation time is executed, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed, but the expectation notice effect is not executed after the execution of the first setting suggestion effect. There is.

On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a long variation time (super-reach miss (120 seconds), super-reach jackpot (120 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice announcement effect are performed. There is enough time to do it. Therefore, it is possible to execute the anticipation degree notice effect after executing the first setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestive effect is executed is determined based on a common table regardless of the variation time, and when the variation time is short, the variation time is long. In either case, the first setting suggesting effect is executed at a common rate. On the other hand, the expectation notice production is executed at a higher rate when the variation time is longer than when the variation time is short. That is, when the variation time of the variation display to be executed is short, and when the variation time of the variation display to be executed is longer than [the ratio of the expectation notice production after the first setting suggestion production is executed]. [Ratio of expectation notice production executed after execution of first setting suggestion production] is higher.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S16TM2030), the display result of the stop display in the second mini-slot variable display and the second change. Whether to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6(J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect is to change the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing and displaying the character icon based on the “character pattern as the display result stopped in the second mini-slot variable display” on the active display 16TM003. It is a production to make. In the present embodiment, the second change effect is executed except when the display result stopped in the second mini-slot variable display is the display result of “no display” in which the character pattern is not displayed. Become. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production (NO in step S16TM2030), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described below.

FIG. 9-6(J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the character/icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation notice production, the character pattern is a minislot as the display result of the second minislot variable display. It is possible to determine "no display", which is a display result that is not displayed in the symbol display area 5LCR1, and any of "CHANCE", "intense heat", and "FEVER" which are character symbols, and each of these displays. A judgment value is assigned to each result.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), when the display result of the variable display is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is “out”), the change is As a display result of the second mini-slot variable display executed in the display, "no display" is selected at a rate of 70%, "CHANCE" is selected at a rate of 25%, and "intense heat" is selected at a rate of 5%. Is selected.

On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the second minislot variable executed in the variable display is performed. As a display result of the display, "no display" is selected at a rate of 22%, "CHANGE" is selected at a rate of 35%, "heat" is selected at a rate of 40%, and "heat" is selected at a rate of 3%. "FEVER" is selected. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "FEVER", the occurrence of the big hit is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), regarding the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display with one reel), “no display”<“CHANCE”<“super heat”<“FEVER” The expectation that it will be a big hit increases in the order of. Therefore, when any of the character designs of "CHANCE", "intense heat", and "FEVER" is stopped (when the second change effect is executed thereafter), no character design is displayed without stopping. The proportion of jackpots is higher than when the result is “no display” (when the second change effect is not executed thereafter). In addition, since the jackpot expectation varies depending on the stopped character pattern, the player pays attention to the display result of the second minislot variable display.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed when the character pattern (one of “CHANCE”, “heat”, and “FEVER”) is stopped as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. The second change effect is executed. Specifically, in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel) of the mini-slot 16TM030, when any of the character symbols "CHANCE", "intense heat", and "FEVER" is stopped and displayed, (i) The stop-displayed character pattern moves upward from the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 and acts on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (see FIG. 9-10(11)), (ii) The active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (12)). This character icon is an icon showing the same character as the character pattern which is the display result of the second minislot variable display. That is, the effect in which the character icon indicating the same character as the character pattern that is the display result is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is “no display”, the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the expected combination of the expectation notice production, which is used to execute the first setting suggestion production, in the expected combination notice production determination table 1 (see FIG. 9-7(K)). (Step S16TM2050), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7(K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the expected winning combination effect winning combination determination table 1. As shown in FIG. 9-7(K), in the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect, a winning combination of the expected degree notice effect, more specifically, the expected degree As the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the notice production (the same applies hereinafter), "outer", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7 sets", and "7 sets (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these winning combinations.

In the present embodiment, when "disappearance" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice production, the minislot symbols of the combination including different symbols are stopped and displayed in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1. For example, when [Replay] is displayed in the minislot symbol display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the minislot symbol display area 5C1, and [Bell] is stopped in the minislot symbol display area 5R1, the expected advance notice effect is achieved. It will be “out”.

In this embodiment, when "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice production, the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 have the same symbol combination. The slot design is stopped and displayed. For example, when the combination of the same symbols is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 as a combination of the same symbols [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon], the expectation notice production is achieved. Becomes "watermelon".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon (via replay)" or "cherry (via replay)" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice production, the same symbol is displayed in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1. After the combination of [Replay], [Replay], and [Replay] minislot symbols is stopped and displayed, the minislot symbols are re-changed in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, and minislot symbols are displayed. Area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 as a combination of the same symbol [watermelon], [watermelon], a combination of mini-slot symbols of [watermelon], or a combination of [cherry], [cherry], a mini-slot symbol of [cherry] Display the stop.

In the present embodiment, when "cherry (freeze)" and "7 set (freeze)" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice production, the normal mode (in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1) ( After performing variable display of the minislot symbols in a freeze mode different from scroll display or update display from top to bottom), [cherry], [cherry], [cherry] in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 ] The combination of the minislot symbols of [7], [7], and the combination of the minislot symbols of [7] are stopped and displayed. The variable display of the freeze mode in the present embodiment means that the visibility of the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is reduced, and the minislot symbol that performs scroll display or update display from the bottom to the top is executed. It is a variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 is “no display” (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is “out” at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character pattern to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANGE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " In the case of “CHANCE”), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is “out” at a rate of 5%, “watermelon” at a rate of 45%, and “watermelon (via replay)” at a rate of 20%. The ratio becomes 20%, “cherry”, 2% becomes “cherry (via replay)”, and 8% becomes “cherry (freeze)”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character design to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot design display area 5LCR1 is “intense heat” (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is In the case of "intense heat"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 10%, and "40%" at a rate of 40%. It becomes "cherry", 10% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 25% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character pattern to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is “FEVER” (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is “ In the case of “FEVER”), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is “7 sets” at a rate of 70% and “7 sets (freeze)” at a rate of 30%.

As shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the winning combination is “off”, the stop symbol is “no display” or “CHANCE”, and when the winning symbol is “watermelon” or “cherry”, the stop symbol ( When the character icon) becomes “CHANCE” or “intense heat” and the winning combination is “7 sets”, the stop symbol (character icon) becomes “FEVER”. In addition, when the winning combination is "disappeared", "no display" is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol than "CHANCE", and when the winning symbol is "watermelon", the stop symbol (character icon) is "hot". "CHANCE" is more likely to be selected than "CHANCE" as the stop symbol (character icon) when the winning combination is "cherry".

That is, with respect to the stop symbols of the second mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state becomes higher in the order of “no display”<“CHANCE”<“intense heat”<“FEVER”. Regarding the winning combination of the mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher in the order of “out”<“watermelon”<“cherry”<“7 sets”. Also, when "7 sets" is selected as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display, the stop symbol of the second mini-slot variable display is always "FEVER", so "7 sets" is confirmed as a big hit. It is a production of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the degree of expectation to be controlled in the big hit game state according to the winning combination constituted by a plurality of types of minislot symbols, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), the winning combination accompanied by the variable display of the freeze mode is limited to “cherry (freeze)” and “7 set (freeze)”. When "Cherry (Freeze)" is selected as the winning combination, the display result (character icon) is "CHANCE" or "Hot", and when "7 sets (Freeze)" is selected as the winning combination. Indicates that the notice character (character icon) is "FEVER". That is, in the case where the minislot pattern is variably displayed in the freeze mode, a winning combination of "cherry" or higher ("cherry" or "7 sets") is determined, so the minislot pattern is variably displayed in the normal mode. The expectation of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than that in the case of performing it. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the variable display mode of the minislot pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the presence/absence of the expectation notice effect is selected when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. The determination is made based on the expected degree announcement production execution determination table 2 (see (I1) and (I2) in FIG. 9-6) (step S16TM2120).

FIG. 9-6 (I1) shows a case where it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, and shows an execution ratio of the expectation notice effect when the display result is “out”. In the determination table 2 for determining whether or not to execute the expectation notice production, a determination value for determining whether to execute the expectation notice production is assigned to each of the out-of-range variation patterns. When the variation pattern is “out of reach” (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “out of normal reach” (variation time is 30 seconds), it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 80%, and to perform at a rate of 20%. .. Further, when the variation pattern is “out of super reach” (variation time is 120 seconds), it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 40%, and it is determined to be performed at a rate of 60%. To do.

FIG. 9-6 (I2) shows the execution rate of the expectation notice production when the display result is “big hit” when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion production. The determination value for determining whether or not to execute the expectation notice production is assigned to each of the jackpot variation patterns in the expectation notice notice execution table 2. When the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 30%, and executes it at a rate of 70%. Decide to. When the variation pattern is “super reach jackpot” (variation time is 120 seconds), it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 10% and 90%. To do.

Here, in the example of (H1) and (H2) of FIG. 9 in which it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, when the variation pattern of “normal reach” is selected, the expectation notice effect is not executed. In the example of (I1) and (I2) of FIG. 9 in which it is determined (“No execution” is 100%), but the first setting suggestion effect is not performed, the “normal reach” variation pattern is selected. In this case, it is possible to decide to execute the expectation notice production (“Execution” is 20% for “out of normal reach” and 70% for “normal reach jackpot”).

Further, in the example of (H1) and (H2) in FIG. 9 where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the ratio of executing the expectation notice effect when the variation pattern of "super reach" is selected (" In the example of (I1) and (I2) of FIG. 9 in which it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, rather than 40% in “Super reach hit” and 80% in “Super reach jackpot”, When the variation pattern is selected, the ratio of executing the anticipation notice production is higher (60% for "super-reach miss" and 90% for "super-reach jackpot"). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the expectation notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. ..

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S16TM2130), the display result of the stop display in the second mini-slot variable display described above and the second change. Whether to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6(J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production (NO in step S16TM2130), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the expected combination of the expected degree notice effect, which is used when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed (see FIG. 9-7(L)). (Step S16TM2150), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7 (L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the expected winning combination effect winning combination determination table 2. As shown in FIG. 9-7(L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestive effect, a winning combination of the expected degree notice effect, more specifically, the expected degree As the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the notice production (the same applies below), "outer", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7 sets", and "7 sets (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these winning combinations.

As shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is “out” at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character pattern to be stopped and displayed in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CANCE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " In the case of “CHANCE”), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is “out” at a rate of 5%, “watermelon” at a rate of 15%, and “watermelon (via replay)” at a rate of 50%. Becomes 2%, becomes “cherry”, 18% becomes “cherry (via replay)”, and 10% becomes “cherry (freeze)”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character design to be stopped and displayed in the minislot design display area 5LCR1 is “intense heat” (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is In the case of "intense heat", the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 10%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 15%, and "at a rate of 10%". It becomes "cherry", 38% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 27% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character pattern to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " In the case of “FEVER”), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is “7 sets” at a rate of 30% and “7 sets (freeze)” at a rate of 70%.

In the present embodiment, the first mini-slot in the expectation notice production is performed depending on whether it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. Although an example in which the winning combination of the variable display (that is, the winning combination other than “bell”) is determined based on a different table has been shown, the invention is not limited to such a form and it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display (that is, the winning combination other than "bell") in the expectation notice production is common between the case where it is determined that the first setting suggestion production is not executed. The table may be determined based on the table. That is, the presence/absence of execution of the expectation notice production is determined at different ratios (based on the presence/absence determination table of different expectation notice production) in step S16TM2020 and step S16TM2120, while the common winning combination in step S16TM2050 and step S16TM2150 is determined. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice production may be determined based on the determination table.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability low base state (normal state), the first in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 every time the variable display is executed. The minislot variable display (first time) is executed, and the winning combination is “bell” or “out”. Then, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) is finished, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed during the variable display (expectation degree notice effect is executed). Case) and (ii) the case where the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (when the expectation notice production is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation notice production is executed), the winning combination determined based on the winning combination determination table is realized. After that, the second minislot variable display (first time) is further executed in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) a pattern that does not include a character (“no display”), or (b) a character pattern (“CHANCE”, “intense heat”) , "FEVER") stops. (B) When the character pattern (“CHANCE”, “intense heat”, “FEVER”) is stopped, the second change effect in which the character icon based on the character pattern is added to the active display is executed. Become.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the second minislot variable display (first time) is executed, and (a) when the design not including the character (“no display”) is stopped, that is, the second Even if the change effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before that, and the effect combination in which the winning combination is always “out” is adopted. .. Not limited to this, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) a symbol that does not include a character (“no display”) is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed) In addition, in (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before that, there may be a possibility that a winning combination other than “miss” may be achieved.

In addition, when the second minislot variable display (first time) is executed and the symbol (a) that does not include the character (“no display”) is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed), (I) The first minislot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first minislot variable display (first time) in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (first time), in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in one reel system) The second minislot variable display (first time) may be executed.

In addition, as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), the (b) character pattern (“CHANCE”, “intense heat”, “FEVER”) may be stopped. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is executed, the second change effect may be executed after that. When such an effect configuration is adopted, the winning combination of (i) the first minislot variable display (second time) executed before the second minislot variable display (first time) is “out”. May not be set.

Next, when the value of the variation counter is 25×n (n is an integer) [multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second setting suggestion effect described later. Whether or not it is determined based on the execution setting determination table for the second setting suggestive effect (see FIG. 9-7(M)) (step S16TM2070), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the variation counter is not 25×n (n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low accurate low base state, the second setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect that suggests the currently set setting value. This second setting suggestive effect is a variation number display 16TM040 displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and is purple at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started. It is an effect that changes the mode. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is ended, and the variation count display 16TM040 displayed in the purple mode in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in the normal mode. Return to.

In FIG. 9-7(M), a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestive effect is assigned according to the currently set setting value. When the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90%, and determines to execute at a rate of 10%. When the set value is "2", it is determined that the second setting suggestive effect is not executed at a rate of 88%, and is executed at a rate of 12%. When the set value is "3", it is determined not to execute the second setting suggestive effect at a rate of 86%, and to execute at a rate of 14%. When the setting value is "4", it is determined not to execute the second setting suggestive effect at a rate of 84%, and to execute at a rate of 16%. When the set value is "5", it is determined not to execute the second setting suggestive effect at a rate of 82%, and to execute at a rate of 18%. When the set value is “6”, it is determined that the second setting suggestive effect is not executed at a rate of 80%, and is executed at a rate of 20%.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability low-base state, the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestive effect, the second change effect, and the expectation notice effect are executed. However, the game state is not limited to such a form, and when the game state is one of the low-precision high base state, the high-precision high base state, and the high-precision low base state, the image display device 5 is mini-displayed. The slot 16TM030 may be displayed to execute any of the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, or the expectation notice announcement effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability low-base state, the example of displaying the variation number display 16TM040 on the image display device 5 and executing the second setting suggestion effect has been described. Not limited to the form, when the game state is one of the low-probability high-base state, the high-probability high-base state, or the high-probability low base state, the variation display 16TM040 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second You may perform setting suggestion production.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, after determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect is determined in step S16TM2020 or step S16TM2120, and further in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150. The winning role for the announcement of expectations is decided. When determining the first setting suggestive effect in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. 9-6(G), it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggesting effect based on the currently set setting value. In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the variation pattern (variation time).

Further, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES in step S16TM2010) and the expectation notice effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2), the change pattern (change time). Based on the above, whether or not to execute the expectation notice production is determined. When the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach (10 seconds), normal reach (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), it is determined that 100% of the time will not be executed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern (variation time) is out of super-reach (120 seconds), it is decided to execute the anticipation notice production at a rate of 40%, and in the case of super-reach jackpot (120 seconds) Determines to execute the anticipation notice production at a rate of 80%.

In this way, the first setting suggestive effect can be executed regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), and regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 can be displayed. It is possible to stop and display a combination of the [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] minislot symbols. Further, when the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect can be executed, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1 and 5C1 of the image display device 5 can be executed. , 5R1, [Bell], [Bell], after the combination display of the mini-slot of [Bell] is stopped and displayed, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 are the same except for [Bell]. It is possible to stop and display a combination of symbols (for example, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] or [7], [7], [7], etc.). With such a configuration, in the mini-slot 16TM030, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value, and also it is possible to execute the expectation notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the display result will be a "big hit". Next, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(G), the player himself/herself counts the number of times of execution of the first setting suggestion effect each time the first setting suggestion effect having a different execution ratio according to the set value is executed. , The player himself/herself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect [the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect=(the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect/the number of fluctuations)×100], and the calculated first setting suggestion By determining which of the set values of the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect for each well-known setting value is close to the effect execution ratio, the player can guess the set value.

Temporarily, the determination of whether or not to execute the expectation notice performance is performed prior to the determination of whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion production, and the expectation notice production is executed with priority over the first setting suggestion production. In this case, the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion production itself is not performed or the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion production is won due to the relationship between the determination that the expectation notice production is executed and the variation time. Even if the anticipation degree notice effect is prioritized, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed. As a result, the degree of deviation between the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect calculated by the player and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect based on the actual set value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestive effect as an element for estimating the set value may be reduced, and the player may not pay attention. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in step S16TM2000 and step S16TM2020 in FIG. A configuration is adopted in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the expectation notice effect.

(Specific example of executing change effect and setting suggestion effect)
Next, regarding a specific example in the case where it is determined to execute the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation notice announcement effect, FIGS. A description will be given using -10. FIG. 9-8 is a time chart when executing the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation notice announcement effect. -10 shows an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when executing the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation notice effect. FIG.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, in the first start winning determination process (S101A), when the start winning is achieved, the CPU 103 displays the variable display corresponding to the start winning as a “big hit”. This is an example of the case where it is determined (when it is designated by the symbol designating command). Based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to be a red mode in step S16TM1010 in the start winning change effect determination process, and changes the active display in step S16TM1020. This is an example in the case where it is determined that the pattern is the change pattern 022, and that the first change effect in the successful mode is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 determines at the start of fluctuation that the display result of the variable display is “big hit” (designated by the display result designation command), and sets the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable display as “super reach big hit”. (120 seconds)” (when specified by the variation pattern command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000 in the fluctuation start effect determination process when the fluctuation starts, and executes the expectation notice effect in step S16TM2020. Then, in step S16TM2040, it is determined that the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is “heat”, and it is determined that the second change effect is executed. This is an example of a case where it is decided to set the winning combination of “cherry (freeze)” and to execute the second setting suggestive effect in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low-probability low-base state, the display of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) Based on the result being “out”, the effect control CPU 120 determines when the variable display is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative patterns (“247” in this example) is continuously displayed. Also, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was “out”, the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area of the image display device 5 In 5c and the small symbol display area 5r, the combination of small symbols (“247” in this example) when the variable display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 to display four first hold displays 16TM001 in correspondence with the first hold storage number being four.

In the low accurate low base state, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), the number of times the variable display is executed in the image display device 5 during the low accurate low base state (normal state) is displayed. The fluctuation number display 16TM040 shown is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the variation display has been executed 124 times up to the present time after the transition to the low-accuracy low-base state, and as shown in FIG. The screen in the case where the character is displayed in the normal mode (white mode) is shown.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the winning combination (display result) of the variable display of the minislot symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was “out”, the mini of the image display device 5 was performed. In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, a combination of minislot symbols (in this example, [replay] [replay] [bell]) when the variable display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-8 ), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate. The variable display of decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, which corresponds to the first number of reserved memories being 3. Then, three first hold displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, in a state in which the variable display of decorative symbols is continued, The second setting suggestion effect is executed based on the decision to execute the second setting suggestion effect in S16TM2070. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 125 times up to the present time after the transition to the low accurate low base state, and as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), the fluctuation count display 16TM040 is “125” or the like. The case where the character is displayed in a purple mode is shown. The player recognizes that the setting suggestion has been made by changing the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 from the normal mode (white mode) up to that time to the purple mode. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(3), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state where the variable display of decorative symbols is continued in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (T2 timing shown in -8), based on the fact that it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, in the mini-slot Variable display of symbols (first mini-slot variable display) is started. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(4), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state where the variable display of decorative symbols is continued in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (T3 timing shown in -8), the second setting suggestion effect is ended, and the number of fluctuations display 16TM040 (characters such as "125") displayed in the purple mode is returned to the normal mode (white mode). At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, and the minislot symbols are variable in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5. The display is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(5), the effect control CPU 120 keeps the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). -8), it is determined that the change pattern of the active display is changed to the change pattern 022 in step S16TM1020, and it is determined that the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The first change effect of the aspect is executed. In this example, the character 16TM050 appears and an effect of throwing a ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 hits the active display 16TM003, the player can be expected to change the mode of the active display 16TM003.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, and in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5. , The variable display of minislot pattern is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(6), the effect control CPU 120 keeps the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (T5 timing shown in -8), the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, the white circular display to the red circular shape) in response to the execution of the first change effect of the successful mode. Display). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (in this example, [bell][ Stop [Bell] [Bell]).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(7), the effect control CPU 120 keeps the variable display of the decorative pattern in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (T6 timing shown in -8), based on the fact that it is determined in step S16TM2050 that the winning combination of the expectation notice production is "cherry (freeze)", the expectation notice production is executed, and the image display device is executed. In the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of 5, variable display of the minislot symbols in the freeze mode is started. In this example, when the variable display of the freeze mode is executed, the visibility of the minislot pattern is visually reduced by displaying the darkened image 16TM100 as the covering image covering the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1. In the difficult state, the variable display (scroll display or update display) of minislot symbols from the bottom to the top is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5.

In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the visibility of the minislot symbol, by displaying the darkened image 16TM100 that covers the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, the mini-display having a lower display priority than the darkened image 16TM100 is displayed. Although the slot pattern is difficult to visually recognize, but slightly visible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%), the slot pattern is not limited to such a form, and the slotted pattern is more than the darkened image 16TM100. A minislot pattern with a low display priority (an image that is visible in the back of the darkened image 16TM100 when the player has a lower display layer) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layered transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is 0). %)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(8), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (T7 timing shown in -8), based on the fact that it is decided to set "cherry (freeze)" as the winning combination of the expectation notice production in step S16TM2050, the minislot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 In 5C1 and 5R1, a combination of minislot symbols (in this example, [cherry] [cherry] [cherry]) when the winning combination is “cherry” is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 sets “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper portion of the image display device 5 (timing T8 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the small symbol is stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and also in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable is continuously displayed without being displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from the mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to the mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display when the reach state is established. .. That is, the area in which the minislot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the three-slot minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 to the one-reel minislot symbol display area 5LCR1. In the 1-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1, it is possible to display any of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols (“no display”, “CHANCE”, “intense heat”, “FEVER”) as a display result. When the result is a design including a notice character ("CHANCE", "intense heat", "FEVER"), based on the display result, the icon of the notice character that is the display result is added to the active display. The second change effect is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the minislot symbols in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10(10), the effect control CPU 120 has determined in step S16TM2040 to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to "heat", that is, Based on the fact that the notice character of the expectation notice production is decided to be "heat", the symbols including the notice character of "heat" are stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of the image display device 5. (T9 timing in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (11 ), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the second change effect (stop displaying the symbol including the notice character) in step S16TM2040. Based on this, the second change effect is executed (timing of T10 in FIG. 9-8). In this example, when changing the display mode of the active display 16TM003, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the symbol of "hot heat") stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is changed from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. After moving to the active display area 16TM013, an effect that acts on the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, by displaying an effect image indicating that the minislot pattern (in this example, the "heat" pattern) that has popped out of the minislot pattern display area 5LCR1 has hit the active display 16TM003, It suggests to the player that the mode of the active display 16TM003 changes. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (12), the battle effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the super reach. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the teammate character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 (timing T11 shown in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays a character icon (in this example, a character icon of "heat") on the active display 16TM003, which is based on the minislot pattern stopped and displayed in the minislot pattern display area 5LCR1. The display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed. In other words, a character icon indicating the same character as the notice character (“intense heat” in this example) that is the display result is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, when the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed in the active display area 16TM013, the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 A combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" ([cherry] [cherry] [cherry] in this example) is stopped and displayed (Fig. 9-9(8)), and subsequently, minislot symbol display In the area 5LCR1, a minislot pattern (“intense heat” in this example) as a notice character of the expectation notice production is stopped and displayed (FIG. 9-10(10)), and then stopped in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1. The second change effect of adding a character icon indicating the same character as the displayed mini-slot pattern (in this example, “heat”) to the active display 16TM003 is executed (FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12)). )).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed in accordance with the combination of the minislot symbols stopped and displayed in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Since the two-change effect can be executed, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, the first setting suggestion effect is ended before the battle effect executed according to the variation pattern of the super reach is started. I am trying. That is, before the battle effect is executed, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect (in this example, [bell][ Bell] [bell]) is hidden. In this way, the first setting suggesting effect that suggests the setting value is executed in the first half of the variable display (before the reach state is established), that is, at the stage before the display result of the variable display is suggested. It is possible to raise interest in suggestive production. Also, the latter half of the variable display (after the reach state is established), that is, the stage after the display result of the variable display is suggested (after the battle staging to inform whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is started). Since the first setting suggestion effect has already been completed, the display result of the variable display (the result of the battle effect) can be focused on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), based on the fact that it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and not execute the expectation notice effect, the minislot symbol display of the image display device 5 is performed. In the areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is “out” (in this example, [replay] [replay] [bell]) is stopped. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9(6), based on the fact that it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, it is established in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5. The combination of minislot symbols whose role is "bell" (in this example, [bell] [bell] [bell]) is stopped. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9(8), based on the fact that it is determined to execute the expectation notice production and the winning combination is determined to be “cherry”, the mini slot symbol display of the image display device 5 is performed. A combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" (in this example, [cherry] [cherry] [cherry]) is stopped in the areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. In this way, since it is possible to stop and display any of a plurality of types of winning combinations in the minislot 16TM030, the minislot 16TM030 is used to variably display the minislot symbols, so that the game is played. The interest can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) and (3), the number of fluctuations is displayed in the lower left area of the screen of the image display device 5 different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center portion of the screen of the image display device 5). The 2nd setting suggestion effect which changes 16TM040 from a usual mode (white mode) to a purple mode is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 9-6(G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect is in the range of 3% (setting value 1) to 8% (setting value 6). As shown in 9-7 (M), since the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is in the range of 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), both effects are executed the same number of times. If it is assumed that the second setting suggestion effect is more likely to be estimated than the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of times of execution of the first setting suggestion effect is compared with a predetermined effect execution ratio (3% to 8%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6). Then, the setting value corresponding to the effect execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the setting value of the gaming machine. In addition, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of times of execution of the second setting suggestive effect and the predetermined effect execution ratio (10% to 20%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) are compared to determine the former. The set value corresponding to the closest performance execution ratio is estimated as the set value of the game machine. When such an estimation is performed, the set value estimated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is more likely than the setting value estimated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect in the game. It is highly likely that it is the set value of the machine (the reliability of the setting suggestion is high). However, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery is performed for each variation display for the first setting suggestion effect, and the execution lottery is performed for each variation display for 25 times for the second setting suggestion effect. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the first setting suggestive effect is executed more times than the second setting suggestive effect within the same variable display count (within the same time), which is useful for estimating the set value. .. In this way, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the ratios in which the setting values suggested by the effects are the setting values of the game machine are different, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effects.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, the variable display of the small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r provided in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-9, in the special effect area 16TM035 (the lower center part of the screen of the image display device 5), the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, 2 The setting suggestion effect is being executed. In this manner, in the upper part of the screen, the variable display of the small symbols is executed as the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, whereas in the lower part of the screen, the setting suggestive effect (first setting suggestive effect, second By executing the setting suggestion effect), the visibility of the other effect is not deteriorated by one of the effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-3(A), as a display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of winning the start winning, a plurality of types of display modes (normal mode, blue mode, and red mode ( There is a display color). Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9(5), with the appearance of the character 16TM050 and the action effect of throwing the ball toward the active display 16TM003, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 (display The first change effect of changing the color from the normal mode (white circle display) to the red mode (red circle display) is executed. In addition, the second minislot variable display is executed in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the start of fluctuation, and the icon of the character indicated by the character symbol is displayed based on the character symbol which is the display result. The second change effect added to active display 16TM003 is executed. In this way, the first change effect that changes the display color of the active display according to the effect effect executed in the area different from the area in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the area in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed ( A special effect when changing the active display by providing a change effect of a plurality of systems called a second change effect that changes the display shape of the active display according to the effect effect based on the notice character displayed in the special effect area 16TM035). Can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), when the second change effect is executed, the minislot pattern stopped in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in this example, “heat”) However, the effect corresponding to the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 is popped out from the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1. Specifically, the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 popped out of the mini-slot symbol (in this example, "heat"), an effect image showing that the active indicator 16TM003 has been hit is displayed, and then the mini-slot symbol display area. A character icon indicating the same character as the character of the minislot pattern stopped at 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. With such a configuration, the effect executed in the minislot 16TM030 can be associated with the display mode of the active display 16TM003, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), the winning combination of the expectation notice announcement effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in the mini-slot 16TM030 is “miss” or “watermelon”. , “Cherry”, and “7 sets”. Then, in accordance with the determined winning combination, the selection ratio of the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is “no display”, “CHANCE”, “intense heat”, or “FEVER”. Different. Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is a character pattern of any one of "CHANCE", "intense heat", and "FEVER", a mode of the character pattern, This matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. That is, which form of the character icon is added to the active display 16TM003 according to the winning combination of the expectation notice production (first minislot variable display (second time)) executed in the minislot 16TM030. The proportions are different. With such a configuration, the effect executed in the minislot 16TM030 can be associated with the display mode of the active display 16TM003, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display of aggregated results of winning hands)
In the present embodiment, during the demo display, a "volume adjustment" icon for adjusting the volume of the game, a "light amount adjustment" icon for adjusting the amount of light during the game, a low accurate low base state (normal state )) (variable display number of special symbols) and the number of winnings of each winning combination in the minislot 16TM030, a menu screen including an icon of “mini reel information” and the like is displayed. By operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B on this menu screen, it is possible to select each icon of "volume adjustment", "light amount adjustment", and "mini reel information".

9-11 are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of mini reel information.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, the characters “mini reel information” are displayed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, in the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5, the cumulative number of variable displays (variable display of special symbols) executed in the low accurate low base state (normal state) and the number of winnings of each winning combination in the minislot 16TM030. The mini reel information 16TM200 including "," the selected tab 16TM210 in which the character "Today" is displayed, and the next selection tab 16TM220 in which the character "Previous day" is displayed are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed corresponding to the selected tab 16TM210 to prompt the user to operate the stick controller 31A. Further, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the word "return".

In the mini-reel information 16TM200, the character "revolution speed" is displayed at the top as an item indicating the number of times of variable display, and correspondingly, the cumulative total of variable display executed in the low accurate low base state (normal state). The number of times “XXXX times” is displayed. In the second row, the character “bell” is displayed as an item indicating the bell of the winning combination, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times “AAAAA” that the winning combination is “bell” in the first mini-slot variable display is displayed. And “Bell” win probability “(1/aaaaa.a)” [= cumulative number of times “Bell” has been established/cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in a low-probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the third row, the word "watermelon" is displayed as an item indicating the watermelon of the winning combination, and correspondingly, the accumulated number of times "BBBB" that the winning combination is "watermelon" in the first mini-slot variable display is "BBBB". And the winning probability of “Watermelon” “(1/bbbbb.b)” [= Cumulative number of times “Watermelon” was established/Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low-probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the fourth row, the character “cherry” is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination cherry, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times that the winning combination becomes “cherry” in the first mini-slot variable display “CCCC”. "," and the winning probability of "cherry" "(1/cccc.c)" [= cumulative number of times "cherry" has been established/cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in a low-probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the fifth row, the characters "777" are displayed as an item indicating the 7 combinations of winning combinations, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times the winning combination has become "7 matching" in the first mini-slot variable display. "DDDD times" and the winning probability "(1/dddd.d)" of "7 sets" [= the total number of times that "7 sets" have been established/the low-probability low base state (normal state) Is displayed.

In addition, the cumulative number of times (7 DDs) won (DDDD times) is, to the last, a combination of minislot symbols that become “7 IDs” in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the mini slot 16TM030 (in this example, , [7], [7], [7]) has been stopped, and is counted separately from the number of big hits and displayed as an item different from the number of big hits.

Further, each cumulative number (XXXX times, AAAA times, BBBB times, CCCC times, DDDD times) is displayed with a maximum of 4 digits, and the count is stopped at "9999 times". Also, the denominator of the winning probability is displayed in a maximum of 5 digits including the first decimal place, and the count stops at "1/99999.9". For each winning combination, if the number of times of winning is one or more, the winning probability is displayed, and if the number of times of winning is zero, the winning probability display is hidden.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 stores history information (minimum number of times, etc. described above) related to the mini reel information, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the image of the mini reel information based on the stored history information. It can be displayed on the display device 5. Specifically, the history information for three days of "today", "the day before", and "the day before last" is stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 122, and the history information is retained even during power off.

The mini reel information defaults to the mini reel information of "today", and the characters "today" are displayed on the selecting tab 16TM210 and the characters "previous day" are displayed on the next selection tab 16TM220. Further, an operation prompting display 16TM270 prompting the user to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. Every time the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed, the mini reel information is switched from "previous day" to "previous two days", and the selected tab 16TM210 The character is switched from "previous day" to "previous day", and the character of the next selection tab 16TM220 is switched from "previous day" to "today". Then, when the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the "two days before" mini-reel information is selected, it is switched to the "today" mini-reel information again, and the character of the selected tab 16TM210 is displayed. Is switched to "today", and the character of the next selection tab 16TM220 is switched to "previous day".

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the power-on history stored in the backup RAM is referred to. If the date of the previous power-on and the date of the current power-on are different, the history information of "the previous day" is set to " After storing in the storage area corresponding to "Before day" (overwriting history information), store the history information of "Today" in the storage area corresponding to "Previous day" (overwriting history information), and update the data. .. As a result, when the power is turned on at the start of business on “today”, the “previous day” and “previous day” are updated based on the updated “previous day” and “previous day” history information stored in the backup storage area. It is possible to display information about mini reels for each day.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 together with the word "return". When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation prompting display 16TM280 is displayed, the display of the mini reel information ends and the screen returns to the menu screen.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the “mini reel information” icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed, “today”, “ The mini-reel information based on the history information of “previous day” and “two days before” is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, in the mini-reel information 16TM200, it is the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect and the winning probability of "bell" "(1/aaaa.a)" [= "the total number of times "bell" is established/low accurate low base. Cumulative number of variable displays executed in status (normal status)] is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the player himself/herself counts the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect, the player himself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect, and calculates the calculated first setting suggestion effect. It is possible to estimate the set value by determining which set value the execution rate of the first set suggestion effect for each well-known set value approximates. However, when the player himself/herself counts the number of times of execution of the first setting suggestion effect, the number of times of execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be erroneously counted. In the present embodiment, the player can confirm the execution probability (the winning probability of “bell”) of the first setting suggestion effect in the mini reel information by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the demo display. Since it is possible, even if the number of executions of the first setting suggestive effect is mistakenly counted, it is possible to easily grasp the accurate execution probability of the first setting suggestive effect.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are effects that suggest the currently set setting value, but the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are It can be said that it is an effect that suggests that the setting has been changed. For example, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is close to the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect (known execution ratio) corresponding to the setting value 4, and the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is the setting value. It is difficult for the player to estimate the actual setting value when the execution ratio (known execution ratio) of the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to 2 is approximated. However, in such a situation, the execution ratios of the first setting suggestion effects indicated by the mini-reel information of "the day before" and "the day before last" are both the execution ratios of the first setting suggestion effects corresponding to the setting value 1 (well-known. If it is close to the execution ratio), the player can at least infer that the setting value is highly likely to be changed. That is, it can be inferred that the set values of “the day before” and “the day before the previous day” are the set values 1, and the set value of “today” is highly likely to have been changed. Can be estimated to be at least the set value 2 or more.

The setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect that is executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not the setting value is changed on the day. For example, when the setting value is changed on the current day, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the setting value is not changed on the current day.

Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect executed at a different ratio according to the set value. For example, the effect may be executed at a higher rate when the set value is 3 or more than when the set value is 2 or less. Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect in which the effect mode is determined at different rates according to the set value. For example, when the set value is 2 or less, the display color of the setting suggestive effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 70% and red at a rate of 30%, while the set value is 3 or more. Alternatively, the display color of the setting suggestion effect may be determined to be blue at a rate of 30% and red at a rate of 70%.

(2) In the above embodiment, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big hit game state differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of “out”<“watermelon”<“cherry”<“7 sets”. Although an example has been shown, the expectation degree of a big hit of a particular big hit type may be changed according to a winning combination without being limited to such a form. For example, the degree of expectation that the jackpot type is a probability-varying jackpot varies depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation may increase in the order of “out”<“watermelon”<“cherry”<“7 sets”.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example in which the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is “out” is executed based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestive effect Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, but based on the fact that it has been decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (i) the first minislot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is “out” is executed. There may be a case where (ii) the first minislot variable display itself is not executed.

In the case of adopting such an effect configuration, it is determined that (ii) the first minislot variable display itself is not executed based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. When it is decided to execute the expectation notice production, the first mini-slot variable display relating to the expectation notice production is executed, and a winning combination other than "bell" (including "falling") is executed as the winning combination. After the establishment, the second mini-slot variable display relating to the expectation notice production is executed. On the other hand, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (ii) when the first minislot variable display itself is not executed, (b) it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect At times, neither the first minislot variable display nor the second minislot variable display is executed during the variable display.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the menu screen is displayed during the demo display, the mini-reel information is displayed by selecting the “mini-reel information” icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Although an example in which the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect is displayed is displayed on the image display device 5 has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the mini reel information may be displayed during a period other than during the demo display. For example, during the period of the big hit game state including the fanfare period and the ending period, or during the period of the variable display, the "mini reel information" icon is selected by the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, so that the mini reel information is displayed. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the execution probability of the first setting suggestive effect. It should be noted that the execution probability of the first setting suggestive effect may be notified without requiring any operation. For example, it is advantageous for the player such as the ending period of the big hit game state and the variable display that the high base state ends. The execution probability of the first setting suggestive effect may be displayed at the end of such a period.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the mini reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the mini reel information may be displayed in an area different from that of the image display device 5. Is also good. For example, in a gaming machine equipped with a sub-image display device that displays various effect images different from the image display device 5, the mini-reel information is displayed on the sub-image display device during the demo display, the big hit game state, or the variable display. You may do it.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the second change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the active display is shown, but the second change effect is not limited to such an aspect, and the second change effect is a hold display. It may be an effect that changes the display mode. For example, by executing the look-ahead notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display (the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that has not been executed by the display result (character pattern) of the second mini-slot variable display, the second You may perform the 2nd change production which adds the character icon based on the display result of a minislot variable display to the hold display corresponding to the variable display used as the target of the said prefetch notice. As described above, the display result suggested by the second minislot variable display is not limited to the display result of the variable display being executed, and may be the display result of the variable display not being executed. Further, the target of the correspondence information to be changed by the second change effect is not limited to the correspondence information (active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed, but the correspondence information corresponding to the fluctuation display not being executed (held display). May be

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the first mini-slot variable display executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels) is performed twice (the first winning combination is “bell” or “off”). Although the example in which the second winning combination can be executed other than "bell" is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first minislot variable display may be executed three or more times. For example, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display is executed twice and the expectation notice effect is determined to be executed. The first mini-slot variable display relating to the notice effect may be performed twice, and the second mini-slot variable display relating to the expectation notice effect may be executed. For example, when the first mini-slot variable display is executed four times in total, the winning combination of the first time is set to “out”, and the winning combination of the second time is set to “bell” (first setting suggesting effect), the third time It is possible to set the fourth winning combination to be "cherry" after setting the winning combination to be "watermelon".

(8) In the above embodiment, an example in which the second mini-slot variable display is executed only once based on the determination to execute the expectation notice production is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The two minislot variable displays may be executed more than once. For example, the display result of the first mini-slot variable display may be set to “CHANGE”, and then the second mini-slot variable display may be set to “intense heat”. In this way, when the second minislot variable display is executed a plurality of times, each display result is determined so that the display result with a low expectation does not occur after the display result with a high expectation, The fall of the notice character shall be restricted.

Further, the second change effect may be executed plural times in response to the second mini-slot variable display being executed plural times. For example, based on the display result of the first mini-slot variable display being "CANCE", the character icon of "CHANCE" is superimposed on the active display, and then the second mini-slot variable display result is displayed. On the basis of the fact that “is intense”, the character icon “intense heat” may be superimposed on the active display instead of the character icon “CHANCE”. In this way, when the second change effect is executed a plurality of times, each display mode is determined so that the display mode with a high expectation does not change to the display mode with a low expectation, and the active display of the active display is determined. The fall of the display mode is limited.

(9) In the above embodiment, only the freeze mode is illustrated as the special mode of the variable display of the minislot symbols, but the invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of special modes may be provided. For example, as a special mode, in addition to the freeze mode described above, a mode in which the speed at which the minislot symbols are variably displayed (scrolling speed) is extremely faster or extremely slower than the normal mode may be provided. A mode may be provided in which the minislot pattern to be expanded is enlarged (for example, 200% of the normal mode). Further, the ratio of the winning combination may be different depending on the type of special mode. For example, in the second special mode (freeze mode) than in the first special mode (mode in which the minislot pattern is enlarged), the winning combination of the variable display of the minislot pattern is “cherry” or “7 sets”. The ratio may be high.

(10) In the above embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns (variable display time) of minislot symbols may be provided. For example, as the variable display pattern of the minislot pattern, a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds and a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds may be provided. Then, the winning combination may be determined at different rates according to the variable display pattern of the minislot symbols. For example, in the case where the variable display pattern has a variable display time of 30 seconds, the ratio of the winning combination being “cherry” or “7 sets” is higher than that in the variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds. May be high.

(11) In the above embodiment, the combination of minislot symbols is stopped and displayed in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (the winning combination is established), and the minislot symbol is displayed in a mode corresponding to the winning combination. The effect image may be displayed in the display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1. For example, when "Replay" is established as a winning combination, a blue effect image is displayed, when "Bell" is established as a winning combination, a yellow effect image is displayed, and "Watermelon" is established as a winning combination. , A green effect image is displayed, a red effect image is displayed when "cherry" is established as a winning combination, and a rainbow effect image is displayed when "7 sets" is established as a winning combination. Good.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example in which "7 sets" is stopped and displayed as a winning combination for notifying that the big hit has been fixed is shown in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, but not limited to this. , "BAR complete" may be stopped and displayed as a winning combination for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. The "BAR complete" stop display as a winning combination is to stop and display the combination of [BAR], [BAR], and [BAR] in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. Further, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which when the "7 match" is established, the probability variation big hit is decided, and when the "BAR match" is established, the normal big hit is decided.

(13) In the above embodiment, regardless of whether or not the mini-slot 16TM030 including the mini-slot symbol is displaying the variable display of the special symbol (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed), Although an example in which the information can be displayed is shown regardless of the number of reserved memories, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the minislot 16TM030 may be hidden during a predetermined period. For example, the minislot 16TM030 may be hidden while the effect of super reach is being executed.

(14) In the above embodiment, an example in which the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) is not established multiple times except for “off” in the variable display of one special symbol has been described. Without being limited to such a form, the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) that is not "off" may be established multiple times during the variable display of one special symbol. If such a configuration is adopted, and if the total number of times that the winning combination (for example, [bell]) is achieved is included in the cumulative number of times, [how many fluctuation displays out of n times the fluctuation displays are executed] It has become extremely difficult to grasp the most important information for inferring the set value, such as "whether the winning combination [bell] has been achieved", and the importance of the information displayed in the mini-reel information 16TM200. It may decrease and the player may stop paying attention. In order to solve such a problem, even when the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) is established multiple times during one variation display of the special symbol, the same winning combination is displayed during this variation display. The cumulative number of times is counted with the number of times of establishment as one. For example, even if the winning combination of "bell" is established three times during the variable display of one special symbol, the number of times the winning combination of "bell" is established during this variation display is regarded as one, and the mini reel 1 is added to the cumulative number of times that the “bell” of the information 16TM200 is won.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the number-of-changes display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the setting suggestive mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value is shown. With respect to the set value (for example, a set value such as 5, 6 which is particularly advantageous to the player), the setting suggestion mode may be different from the case of other set values. For example, when the set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the display mode of the variation count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the first setting suggestive mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. Then, when the set value is 5 or 6, the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the second setting suggestive mode (for example, gold mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. As to whether or not to adopt the first setting suggestion mode, as described above, the lottery is performed once every 25 times, while as to whether or not to adopt the second setting suggestion mode, 50 The lottery may be performed once every other time. Then, when it is determined to be the second setting suggesting mode, the variation number display 16TM040 is displayed as the second setting suggesting mode (for example, the gold mode regardless of whether the first setting suggesting mode is determined. ).

(16) In the embodiment described above, in the low-probability low-base state (normal state), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect is set in common regardless of the variation pattern (variation time). Not limited to this, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect may be changed according to the variation pattern (variation time). For example, a variation pattern with a long variation time is better than a variation pattern with a short variation time. The first setting suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate.

(17) In the above embodiment, an example in which the variable display of the minislot symbols is executed in the lower center of the screen and the set value is suggested by the display result is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the minislot is not limited thereto. The setting value may be suggested by another effect executed corresponding to the variable display of the symbols. For example, an effect in which any one of a plurality of types of characters appears corresponding to the variable display of minislot symbols may be performed, and the set value may be suggested depending on the type of the appearing character.

Note that the variable display of the minislot symbols and other effects corresponding to the variable display of the minislot symbols may be executed in an area different from the lower center part of the screen. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, which is the right edge or the left edge of the screen. It may be executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, the effect on the hold display and the effect on the active display are the lower center part of the screen (see FIG. 9-10(11)) or the lower right part (FIG. 9-9(5)). However, these effects may be performed in different areas. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, which is the right edge or the left edge of the screen. It may be executed.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect by the variable display of the minislot symbol are executed in the low-probability low base state (normal state) is shown, but the invention is not limited to this. It may be executed in the high-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state (KT control in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state).

In such an effect structure, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect (the rate at which the winning combination is “bell”) is [(variable display of the decorative pattern (special symbol) executed in the game state in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed). (Number of times), the ratio of the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed in the game state (the number of times the winning combination is “bell” in the variable display of the minislot symbols)”. If the variable display of the minislot symbol is executed with, [(the number of times the winning combination becomes “bell” in the variable display of the minislot symbol executed in the high-accuracy high-base state) ÷ (high-accuracy high-base The decorative display (variable display frequency of the decorative pattern) executed in the state]), the execution ratio of the setting suggesting effect is calculated, and the set value is suggested by the calculated value. ), when the variable display of the minislot symbol is executed, [(the number of times the winning combination becomes “bell” in the variable display of the minislot symbol executed in the high-accuracy low base state (KT state))÷ The execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is calculated by (the number of times of variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the highly accurate low base state (KT state)), and the setting value is suggested by the calculated value.

The above [description regarding the characteristic part 16TM] shows an example of the configuration of the following means A1 to A10 and an example of the configuration of the following means B1 to B10.

Here, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and the setting values before and after the setting is changed. There has been proposed a game machine that displays a character image according to. Regarding a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), there is room for improving the interest of production. The configurations related to the means A1 to A10 described below and the configurations related to the means B1 to B10 described below have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and any one of a plurality of setting values is set. The purpose of the present invention is to improve the interest of the production related to the game machine that can be set to the value.

The gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1) of means A1 is
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Variable display means capable of executing variable display (variable display) (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120),
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5),
The display means is a special display (combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") corresponding to the setting suggestion relating to the setting means, and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of the control of the advantageous state (the winning combination is ""Watermelon","cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols such as "7 sets", "no display", "CHANCE", "intense heat", or "FEVER" symbols) can be displayed.
When the variable display period is the predetermined period, the special display can be displayed (variation pattern (variation time) is out of non-reach (10 seconds), out of normal reach (30 seconds), or in normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), It is possible to stop and display a combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is “bell”), and it is possible to display the specific display after displaying the special display when the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period. (If the variation pattern (variation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds) or super reach jackpot (120 seconds), the winning combination will be displayed after the combination of minislot symbols for which the winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed. The combination of mini-slot symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, or “7 sets” is stopped and displayed, and further, the symbols of “no display”, “CHANCE”, “intense heat”, or “FEVER” are stopped and displayed. It is possible)).
With such a configuration, the special display can be displayed with priority over the specific display, so that the interest regarding setting suggestion can be improved.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The production control means for controlling the production (CPU 120 for production control) is provided,
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to the set value. It is determined whether or not to perform the setting (whether or not to execute the first setting suggesting effect is determined for each variable display (step S16TM2000), and as shown in FIG. 9-6(G), the first setting is performed according to the setting value. Execution rate of suggestive production is different)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the player can estimate the set value when the variable display is executed.

The game machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The production control means for controlling the production (CPU 120 for production control) is provided,
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to the set value. It is determined whether or not to perform, and whether or not to display the specific display after the determination is performed (as shown in FIG. 9-5, it is determined in step S16TM2000 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect). Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation notice production.)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, since it is determined whether or not to display the specific display after determining whether or not to display the special display, it is possible to perform appropriate effect control in which the special display is prioritized.

The game machine of means A4,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A3,
The display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) displays the special display (combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") when a specific effect (battle effect in super reach) is executed. The feature is that it is hidden.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific effect.

The game machine of means A5,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A4,
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern),
The display means (production control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (minislot pattern) in a specific area (minislot pattern display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). Variable display) can be executed, and the special display (combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or the specific display (the winning combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or " Combination of mini-slot symbols to be "7 sets", or a character pattern of "CHANCE", "intense heat", or "FEVER"), or a predetermined display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning combination is "off"), or , "No display") can be displayed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect executed in the specific area of the display unit.

The game machine of means A6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A5,
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern),
The display means (production control CPU 120) can execute variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of minislot symbols) in a specific area (minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes the special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the winning combination when the mini-slot symbols perform variable display in the freeze mode is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 set (freeze)", and "cherry" Since the above winning combination (“cherry” or “7 sets”) is confirmed, the expectation that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in the normal mode.
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes the special mode, so that the player can focus on the display means.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A6,
There are multiple types of the specific display (“watermelon”, “cherry”, and “7 sets” as the winning combination, and “no display”, “CHANCE”, “intense heat”, and “FEVER” as display results. ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), the expectation degree to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state is “watermelon”<“cherry”< (It becomes higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the type of specific display interested.

The game machine of means A8,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A7,
Storage means (RAM 122 of the production control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the total number of times the combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed),
When the predetermined condition is met (when the menu screen is displayed, the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the winning combination is A history display unit (image display device 5 displaying the mini-reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "bell" winning probability) is provided.
With such a configuration, since the player estimates the set value, it is possible to easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display.

The game machine of means A9,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A8,
The display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) indicating a set value in a special area (lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5),
The ratio at which the special display is displayed and the ratio at which the special display is displayed are different (the first setting suggestive effect is performed by performing a lottery for each variable display, and the second setting suggestive effect is performed 25 times. (A lottery is carried out for each variable display)
The proportion of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the gaming machine and the proportion of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the gaming machine are different (Fig. 9-6). As shown in (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect is 3% (setting value 1) to 8% (setting value 6), while as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M). In addition, since the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), the actual effect execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect The proportion of the set value estimated based on the match with the set value of the gaming machine is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested setting value to the setting value of the gaming machine differs depending on whether it is the special display or the special display. You can draw attention to what is suggested.

The game machine of means A10 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A9,
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of the first decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern) in the first area (decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the center of the screen). The variable display (variable display of small symbols) of the second decorative identification information, which is less visible than the first decorative identification information, can be executed in the second area (small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r in the upper right part of the screen). Yes,
The display means (production control CPU 120) can display at least one of the special display and the specific display in the first area (mini-slot symbols in the mini-reel symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 at the lower center of the screen). A combination is displayed), and the display of the special display and the specific display in the second area is restricted (minislot symbols are not displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the second decoration identification information in the second region from being reduced.

The gaming machine of means B1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) is
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Variable display means capable of executing variable display (variable display) (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120),
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5),
The display means is a special display (combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") corresponding to the setting suggestion relating to the setting means, and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of the control of the advantageous state (the winning combination is "Watermelon","cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols such as "7 sets", "no display", "CHANCE", "hot heat", or "FEVER" symbol) can be displayed in a specific area. ,
Corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 16TM003) corresponding to variable display,
The specific display is displayed in the specific area (as shown in FIG. 9-9(8), in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, a combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" is displayed. After the stop display, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the display mode of the correspondence is changed in response to the stop display of the character pattern of “heat” in the minislot pattern display area 5LCR1). Change effect to be made (as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), a second change effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot pattern (“heat”) is added to the active display 16TM030) And a performance executing means (CPU 120 for performance control) capable of executing the game machine.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine capable of displaying the special display corresponding to the setting suggestion, the change effect can be executed in response to the display of the specific display in the specific area. Can be improved.

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
There are a plurality of special modes (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) as modes of the corresponding display (active display),
The effect machine (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special effect (first change effect) that changes the special aspect of the correspondence display.
With such a configuration, the player can be expected to change the correspondence display of the special mode.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute, as the change effect (second change effect), an effect that acts on the corresponding display (active display) that is the target of the change effect (FIGS. 9-10). As shown in (11) and (12), an effect indicating that the minislot pattern (“heat”) stopped and displayed in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the minislot 16TM30 and hits the active display 16TM003. After the image is displayed, a character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot pattern ("excited heat") stopped and displayed in the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM030)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the change effect.

The game machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3,
There are a plurality of types of the specific display (as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display, there are “out”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “7 sets”, and as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, "There is no display", "CHANCE", "intense heat", "FEVER"),
Depending on the type of the specific display, the aspect of the corresponding display that is the target of the change effect is determined at different ratios (as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), The winning combination of the mini-slot variable display of 1 is determined to be “out”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, or “7 sets”, and the second mini-slot is determined according to which winning combination is determined. The display ratio of the variable display is "no display", "CHANCE", "intense heat", and "FEVER", the selection ratio is different, and the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is different. Since it matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003, it is added to the active display 16TM003 according to which the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice production is determined. The proportion of the character icon that is different is different)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the type of the specific display and the mode of the corresponding display can be associated with each other, and the interest of the effect can be improved.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B4,
The production control means for controlling the production (CPU 120 for production control) is provided,
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to the set value. It is determined whether or not to perform, and whether or not to display the specific display after the determination is performed (as shown in FIG. 9-5, it is determined in step S16TM2000 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect). Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation notice production.)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, since it is determined whether or not to display the specific display after determining whether or not to display the special display, it is possible to perform appropriate effect control in which the special display is prioritized.

The game machine of means B6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B5,
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern),
The display means (production control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (minislot pattern) in a specific area (minislot pattern display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). Variable display) can be executed, and the special display (combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or the specific display (the winning combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or " Combination of mini-slot symbols to be "7 sets", or a character pattern of "CHANCE", "intense heat", or "FEVER"), or a predetermined display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning combination is "off"), or , "No display") can be displayed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect executed in the specific area of the display unit.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B6,
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern),
The display means (production control CPU 120) can execute variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of minislot symbols) in a specific area (minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes the special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the winning combination when the mini-slot symbols perform variable display in the freeze mode is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 set (freeze)", and "cherry" Since the above winning combination (“cherry” or “7 sets”) is confirmed, the expectation that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in the normal mode.
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes the special mode, so that the player can focus on the display means.

The game machine of means B8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B7,
There are multiple types of the specific display (“watermelon”, “cherry”, and “7 sets” as the winning combination, and “no display”, “CHANCE”, “intense heat”, and “FEVER” as display results. ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), the expectation degree to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state is “watermelon”<“cherry”< (It becomes higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the type of specific display interested.

The game machine of means B9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B8,
Storage means (RAM 122 of the production control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the total number of times the combination of minislot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed),
When the predetermined condition is met (when the menu screen is displayed, the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the winning combination is A history display unit (image display device 5 displaying the mini-reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "bell" winning probability) is provided.
With such a configuration, since the player estimates the set value, it is possible to easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display.

The game machine of means B10 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B9,
The display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) indicating a set value in a special area (lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5),
The ratio at which the special display is displayed and the ratio at which the special display is displayed are different (the first setting suggestive effect is performed by performing a lottery for each variable display, and the second setting suggestive effect is performed 25 times. (A lottery is carried out for each variable display)
The proportion of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the gaming machine and the proportion of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the gaming machine are different (Fig. 9-6). As shown in (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect is 3% (setting value 1) to 8% (setting value 6), while as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M). In addition, since the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), the actual effect execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect The proportion of the set value estimated based on the match with the set value of the gaming machine is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested setting value to the setting value of the gaming machine differs depending on whether it is the special display or the special display. You can draw attention to what is suggested.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 27TM]
Next, the characteristic unit 27TM will be described. The gaming machine shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation regarding the characteristic section 16TM], that is, the gaming machine capable of changing the set value may be provided with the characteristic section 27TM shown below.

Specifically, in the gaming machine provided with the characteristic unit 27TM, the effect image displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol (the effect image corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) is reduced. The divided effect which is divided and displayed in the effect display area left part and the effect display area right part in the performed mode is executed (see FIG. 10-1 ). By this division effect, a variation display of a plurality of special symbols (or a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to each variation display of a plurality of special symbols) is played in parallel at the same time as a game. Can be given to anyone. In this [description regarding the characteristic unit 27TM], description of the same configuration as the configuration described in the above [description regarding the characteristic unit 16TM] will be omitted.

(Screen configuration when executing split production)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each effect information displayed on the screen when the divided effect is executed in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the area in which the effect information can be displayed on the image display device 5 (the area of the entire screen) is the effect display area 27TM005A.

In the upper left part of the effect display area 27TM005A, the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r are provided, and the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r correspond to the variable display of the first special symbol. The variable display of the first small symbol is executed. Further, in the upper right part of the screen of the effect display area 27TM005A, a second small symbol display area is provided, and in this second small symbol display area, the fluctuation of the second small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Display shall be performed.

That is, in this embodiment, as variable display of effect symbols corresponding to variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of decorative symbols (main effect symbols) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, In the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the first small symbol (the sub effect symbol whose visibility is smaller than the main effect symbol) is executed. Further, as a variable display of the effect design corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol (main effect symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the second small symbol display area. Then, the variable display of the second small symbol (the sub effect symbol whose visibility is smaller than the main effect symbol) is executed.

Below the effect display area 27TM005A, a first hold display area 27TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (first hold display 27TM010 of 0 to 4) and an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are displayed. An active display area 27TM031 and a second hold display area 27TM021 that displays the second hold storage number (second hold display 27TM020 of 0 to 4) are provided. With the active display area 27TM031 as the center, the left side as viewed from the player is the first reserved display area 27TM011, and the right side is the second reserved display area 27TM021.

Also, in the vertical center near the left end of the effect display area 27TM005A, a first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 for displaying the first reserved memory number by a number is provided, and in the vicinity of the right end of the effect display area 27TM005A. A second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number by a numeral is provided in the central portion in the vertical direction. Since the number of objects (the first hold display 27TM010) corresponding to the first hold storage number is displayed in the first hold display area 27TM011, the number of objects is greater than that of the first hold storage number displayed in the first hold display area 27TM011. The first reserved storage number displayed in the 1 reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 is less noticeable and has lower visibility. Further, since the number of objects (the second hold display 27TM020) corresponding to the second hold storage number is displayed in the second hold display area 27TM021, the number of the second hold storage numbers displayed in the second hold display area 27TM021 is larger than that of the second hold storage number. Also, the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 is less noticeable and has lower visibility.

In the divided effect, the combination of the decorative pattern (main effect pattern) to be variably displayed and the frame surrounding the decorative pattern is increased from one set to two, and one of them is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. , The other will be displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. In the first effect image display area 27TM100A, a first effect image 27TM100 and a first effect image frame 27TM110 including a first decorative symbol (first main effect symbol) are displayed. In the second effect image display area 27TM200A, a second effect image 27TM200 and a second effect image frame 27TM210 including a second decorative symbol (second main effect symbol) are displayed.

In this way, the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. The second effect information including the image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is effect information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that is being executed. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the common special symbol), the first effect information and the second effect information. And will be displayed in parallel at the same time.

Here, in the first effect information (effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A), the variable display of the special symbol is started. Correspondingly, it is effect information corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120, and continues during the variation display period of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command even after the division effect is completed. The effect display area 27TM005A includes effect information that can be displayed (for example, the first decorative pattern).

On the other hand, the second effect information (effect information including the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A) also corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols. Although it is the production information corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the production control CPU 120, unlike the first production information, the divided production is performed during the variation display period of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. It is effect information that is no longer displayed (hidden is controlled) due to the end of.

Further, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are images that are displayed side by side in the left and right for a predetermined period (within the period during which the divided effect is executed), and one is different from the other within the predetermined period. It may be an aspect. Further, in the present embodiment, an image of a notice effect that suggests the display result of the change display determined in the change start time effect determination process to the first effect image 27TM100 (for example, a cut-in image of a cut-in notice effect described later). ) May be superimposed.

On the other hand, the second effect image 27TM200 is a movie (movie A (short/long) and movie B (short/long) described later in this example) of a predetermined period corresponding to the variation pattern. It is a base image. Therefore, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, the image of the notice effect that suggests the display result of the change display determined in the change start time effect determination process is not displayed in a superimposed manner, but is notified as an image in the movie. An effect image (for example, a cut-in image described later) may be displayed.

When the division effect is executed, (1) the first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A. Contrary to (1) when one pattern of effect control is executed, (2) the second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed on the right part of the effect display area 27TM005A, and on the left part of the effect display area 27TM005A. There is a case in which the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, in the divided effect, (1) the first pattern effect control is executed.

In the present embodiment, in the determination at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol by the CPU 103 (for example, determination at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol), (1) the right part of the screen becomes the first effect image display area 27TM100A, and the left part of the screen. Is determined to execute the effect control of the first pattern that becomes the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed on the right side of the screen. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed on the left part of the screen (see FIG. 10-1).

In addition, in the determination at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol by the CPU 103 (for example, determination at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol), (2) the right part of the screen becomes the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and the left part of the screen is the first part. The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed on the left part of the screen based on the decision to execute the second pattern effect control that is the effect image display area 27TM100A, and the right part of the screen is displayed. Then, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed.

When the effect control of the first pattern is executed in the divided effect, the first effect information is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the second effect information is displayed on the left part of the screen (in the case of FIG. 10A ), The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 that include the background image and the decorative pattern that are reduced compared to before the division effect are the left side of the rectangle (the side on the screen center side) rather than the right side of the rectangle (the side on the right side of the screen). ) Is displayed short, and the upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed such that the distance between the upper side and the lower side of the rectangle decreases from the right end (right side of the screen) to the left end (center side of the screen). That is, in the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110, the left end (screen center side) is located on the screen back side (direction away from the player) from the right end (screen right side) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are viewed from a viewpoint that is in the direction perpendicular to the screen and closer to the player than the screen.

Further, the second effect image 27TM200 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced in size before the division effect, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are the right side of the rectangle (the center side of the screen) rather than the left side of the rectangle (the left side of the screen). Is displayed short, and the upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed such that the distance between the upper side and the lower side of the rectangle becomes smaller from the left end (left side of the screen) to the right end (center side of the screen). That is, in the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210, the right end (screen center side) is located on the screen back side (direction away from the player) from the left end (screen left side) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are viewed from a viewpoint in the direction vertical to the screen and closer to the player than the screen.

On the other hand, when the second pattern effect control is executed in the divided effect, the second effect information is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the first effect information is displayed on the left part of the screen (FIG. 10-1. In the opposite case), the first effect image 27TM100 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced in size before the divided effect, and the first effect image frame 27TM110 have the right side of the rectangle (the left side of the screen) of the rectangle (the left side of the screen). The edge on the center side of the screen is displayed short, and the upper edge of the rectangle and the lower edge of the rectangle are displayed such that the distance between the upper edge and the lower edge of the rectangle decreases from the left end (left side of the screen) to the right end (center side of the screen). That is, in the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110, the right end (screen center side) is located on the screen inner side (direction away from the player) than the left end (screen left side) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are viewed from a viewpoint that is in the direction perpendicular to the screen and closer to the player than the screen.

Further, the second effect image 27TM200 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced in size as compared to before the division effect, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are the left side of the rectangle (the center side of the screen) rather than the right side of the rectangle (the right side of the screen). Is displayed short, and the upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed such that the distance between the upper side and the lower side of the rectangle decreases from the right end (right side of the screen) to the left end (center side of the screen). That is, in the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210, the left end (screen center side) is located on the screen back side (direction away from the player) from the right end (screen right side) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are viewed from a viewpoint in the direction vertical to the screen and closer to the player than the screen.

(First embodiment)
As shown in [Explanation regarding the characteristic part 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. is there. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value. In the first embodiment described below, as an example in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed during the division effect, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. Is characterized in that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

(Specific example of division effect)
A specific mode of the division effect will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the divided effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designating command accompanied by the divisional production of the production image corresponding to the variation pattern designating command accompanied by the divisional production, and the various productions determined by the variation start time production determination process. The effect image is displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A during the variable display period of the decorative pattern based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command.

As shown in FIG. 10-2(1), before the division effect is executed, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, as the decoration identification information, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. The decorative design (main production design) is displayed in a variable manner. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol). In the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Before execution of the divided effect, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display area 27TM005A to display a single background image, and causes the symbol display area 5L on the left side of the center of the effect display area 27TM005A to display a left decorative design, The central decoration pattern is displayed in the central symbol display area 5C of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the right decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 5R on the right side of the center of the effect display area 27TM005A.

The display mode of the background image and the decorative pattern before the division effect is a mode in which a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, right decorative pattern) are superimposed and displayed at the same size on the rectangular background image. Has become. That is, the background image and the decorative pattern are arranged in parallel with the screen in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the background image and the decorative pattern are viewed from a viewpoint in the direction perpendicular to the screen (the player side of the screen). It is a mode.

Moreover, since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays “3” in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a effect display of a combination of two sets of background images and decorative patterns based on the background image and decorative patterns in the information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A as the split effect is executed. It appears on the area 27TM005A. One of the combinations becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the first effect image 27TM100A to be displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right part of the effect display area 27TM005A, along with the execution of the division effect, and effects. The second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left part of the display area 27TM005A. That is, in this example, the first effect information is displayed on the right part of the screen and the second effect information is displayed on the left part of the screen based on the decision to execute the effect control of the first pattern. ing.

Then, in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second In the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the effect image 27TM200, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and the first small symbol in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of symbols is continued.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays “3” in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. "0" is continuously displayed. The active display area 27TM031 continuously displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 continuously displays the first reserved display 27TM010. It is displayed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the divided effect is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, and the second effect image is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the screen. Even if 27TM200 is displayed, the positions of the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015, the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025, the active display area 27TM031, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 are divided. Without changing from the respective positions before the start of production, the first reserved memory number "3", the second reserved memory number "0", the active display 27TM030, and the first reserved display 27TM010 are set at the respective positions before the divided effect start. Is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-2(3), when a predetermined period of time has passed after the division effect was executed, the effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. In the enlarged display period in which the first effect image 27TM100 is gradually enlarged and displayed, the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second effect image 27TM200 and is a player). It is displayed in a superposed manner so that it can be seen from the front. In this way, the display priority of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 in the enlarged display period is the same as the second effect image 27TM200<the first effect image 27TM100. In the area where the effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 overlap, the visibility of the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than that of the second effect image 27TM200.

After the first effect image 27TM100 is further enlarged and displayed from the state of FIG. 10-2 (3) and the second effect image 27TM200 is completely covered (after the second effect image 27TM200 is completely invisible). At the timing when the rectangle of the first effect image 27TM100 (first effect image frame 27TM110) is finally enlarged and displayed until it overlaps the rectangle of the effect display area 27TM005A (the state shown in FIG. 10-2 (4) is reached. Sometimes) the division effect ends.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 (3) and (4), the first decorative pattern displayed in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100 is the timing when the division effect ends. After the divided effect is finished, it is displayed as a decorative pattern in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the effect display area 27TM005A.

In this way, the first effect information has a longer display period displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A than the second effect information. In addition, the first effect information when the split effect ends, and the effect information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A after the end of the effect effect, common effect information (for example, a combination of the same decorative pattern). Therefore, the continuity of the effect is ensured from the execution of the divided effect to the end of the divided effect.

Therefore, for the player, the first effect information, in which the same effect information is continuously displayed even after the end of the effect, is the true effect information and is not displayed when the effect of division is completed. It can be said that the second effect information (movie associated with the variation pattern in advance) is false effect information. Also, the first effect information whose visibility becomes higher when the split effect ends is the true effect information, and the second effect information whose visibility becomes lower when the effect ends (the variation pattern in advance). It can be said that the movie associated with () is more fake performance information.

(Determination of fluctuation pattern)
As described above, the ROM 101 stores the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern. CPU103, based on the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the display result (“out” or “big hit”) of the variation display determined at the start of variation of the special symbol, and the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of winning the start, The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is determined. And the variation pattern designation command which designates the variation pattern is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control.

In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for deviation that is used when it is previously determined that the variation display result is “out” and the variation display result is “big hit”. A jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when determined in advance is prepared in advance.

(Variation pattern type)
As shown in FIG. 10C, in the present embodiment, as the types of variation patterns for deviation, various types of “non-reach deviation”, “normal reach deviation”, “super reach A deviation”, and “super reach B deviation” are classified. There is. Then, for each type of each variation pattern, it corresponds to the presence/absence of execution of divided effect, the mode of divided effect (second display movie type), the number of executions of pseudo-relation and the mode of pseudo-relation (pseudo-relation type). There are fluctuation patterns.

As for the variation pattern type of "non-reach out", the reach state is not established after the variable display is started, and the variation display result finally becomes "out of reach" This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

In the variation pattern type of "normal reach loss", after the variable display is started and the reach state is established, the variable display result is finally "missed" without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. It is the type of the variation pattern in which the combination of the decorative patterns indicating that the change is fixedly stopped.

For the variation pattern type of “super reach A out”, whether or not the teammate character and the enemy character A battle each other to win the jackpot as a super reach effect after the variation display is started and the reach state is established. The battle effect A for informing of whether or not is executed, and further, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character A is executed, and finally, the combination of the decorative patterns indicating that the variable display result is “out” is fixedly stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

As for the variation pattern type of “super reach B out”, whether or not the teammate character and the enemy character B battle with each other as a super reach effect after the variation display is started and the reach state is established is winning the jackpot. A battle effect B for informing of whether or not the friend character is defeated by the enemy character B is executed, and finally the combination of the decorative patterns indicating that the variable display result is “out” is fixedly stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the present embodiment, there are various types of jackpot variation patterns, such as “normal reach jackpot”, “super reach A jackpot”, and “super reach B jackpot”. Then, for each type of each variation pattern, it corresponds to the presence/absence of execution of divided effect, the mode of divided effect (second display movie type), the number of executions of pseudo-relation and the mode of pseudo-relation (pseudo-relation type). There are fluctuation patterns.

In the variation pattern type of "normal reach jackpot", after the variation display is started and the reach state is established, the variation display result is finally "bonus" without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. It is the type of the variation pattern in which the combination of the decorative patterns indicating that the change is fixedly stopped.

As for the variation pattern type of “super reach A big hit”, after the variation display is started and the reach state is established, whether or not the big hit is won by the battle between the ally character and the enemy character A as a super reach effect. The battle effect A for informing of whether or not is executed, and further, the effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character A is executed, and finally the combination of the decorative patterns indicating that the variable display result is "big hit" is fixedly stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

As for the variation pattern type of “super reach B jackpot”, after the variation display is started and the reach state is established, as a super reach effect, the teammate character and the enemy character B battle with each other to win the jackpot. A battle effect B for informing of whether or not is executed, and further, an effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character B is executed, and finally the combination of the decorative patterns indicating that the variable display result is "big hit" is fixedly stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

In this way, in the variation patterns involving super reach (“super reach A out” and “super reach B out”, and “super reach A big hit” and “super reach B big hit”), after the reach state is established, As a super reach effect, a battle effect is performed in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other to notify whether or not the jackpot is won. Then, when the final display result is “big hit” (when the big hit symbol is fixedly stopped), an effect in which the teammate character wins over the enemy character is executed, and when the final display result is “off” (off symbol) Is fixedly stopped), an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed.

In the variation pattern determination table for deviation shown in FIG. 10C, the variation pattern type of “non-reach loss”, the variation pattern type of “normal reach loss”, the variation pattern type of “super reach A loss”, and the “super reach B” For each variation pattern corresponding to each variation pattern type of "off", a determination value for determining the variation pattern for which the display result is "off" is assigned.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-4, each variation of “normal reach jackpot” variation pattern type, “super reach A jackpot” variation pattern type, and “super reach B jackpot” variation pattern type For each variation pattern corresponding to the pattern type, a determination value for determining a variation pattern whose display result is "big hit" is assigned.

(Pseudo ream)
In this embodiment, for each variation pattern, whether or not the pseudo-repeating is executed and the number of executions when the pseudo-repeating is executed are set. When it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the pseudo-repeating operation one or more times, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designating command that designates the variation pattern causes the image display device 5 to display the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern. The pseudo run will be executed one or more times during the period.

The pseudo-relation is the decoration in each display area of the left design, the middle design, and the right design within the period from the start of variable display of the decorative design until the decorative design is fixedly stopped and the display result is derived and displayed. This is an effect in which the symbol is temporarily stopped and then displayed again in a variable manner. By executing the pseudo-relation, within the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed once, that is, within the variable display period of the decorative symbol based on the 1 variation pattern designation command corresponding to 1 reserved memory, as if It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed plural times.

In the pseudo-relation shown in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern made of numbers is temporarily stopped in the display area of the left symbol and the display area of the right symbol, and then the character "NEXT" is made in the display area of the middle symbol. After the pseudo continuous symbols (pseudo continuous symbols 27TM300 shown in FIGS. 10-9 (A2) and (B2) to be described later) are temporarily stopped, the decorative symbols in the respective display areas of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol The variable display of is restarted (so-called re-change is performed). Here, the "state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped" is a state in which the decorative pattern does not completely stop but slightly moves up and down, but is not limited to this, a state in which the decorative pattern is swinging, It may be a state in which the decorative pattern is repeatedly expanded and reduced, and a state in which the decorative pattern is in a form (deformed) different from that at the final stop (at the time of design determination).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, as the types of pseudo-links, there are a type X pseudo-link with a low expectation of a big hit and a type Y pseudo-link with a high expectation of a big hit.

(Pattern fluctuation pattern)
As the variation pattern type of “non-reach out”, there is only a variation pattern of “non-reach out [no division effect, no pseudo-relation]” in which division effect is not executed and pseudo-relation is not executed.

When the display result is “out”, the variation pattern “out of non-reach [no division effect, no pseudo-relation]” is selected at a rate of 60%.

As the variation pattern type of "out of normal reach", the division effect is not executed, and the pseudo rendition is not executed. There is a variation pattern of "out of normal reach [no division effect, pseudo-repetition once (type X)]" in which a low type X pseudo-run is executed once.

When the display result is "out of range", the variation pattern of "out of normal reach [without division effect, without pseudo effect]" is selected at a rate of 7%, and "out of normal reach [without division effect, pseudo effect 1 time ( The variation pattern of “type X)]” is selected at a rate of 5.5%.

As the variation pattern type of “Super reach A out”, the division effect is not executed and the pseudo-relation is not executed. The change pattern of “Super reach A out [No division effect, no pseudo-relation]” and the division effect are not executed. , A variation pattern of "super reach A out [no division effect, one pseudo-repetition once (type X)]" in which a pseudo-relation of type X having a low expectation degree is executed once, and a division effect is not executed, and an expectation degree The pseudo pattern of low type X is executed twice, and the variation pattern of “out of super reach A [no division effect, pseudo number of times twice (type X)] and division effect is not executed and high expectation type There is a variation pattern of “out of super reach A [no division effect, pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]” in which the pseudo-repetition of Y is executed twice.

When the display result is "disappearance", the variation pattern of "disappearance of super reach A [no division effect, no pseudo-relation]" is selected at a rate of 3.5%, and "disappearance of super reach A [no division effect". , Pseudo run 1 time (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 3%, and the change pattern of "super reach A is lost [no division effect, pseudo run 2 times (type X)] is 2.5. %, and the variation pattern of “out of super reach A [no division effect, 2 pseudo runs (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 2%.

As the variation pattern type of “super reach A out”, the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Among them, the division effect in which the movie A (short) of the type having a short reproduction period is reproduced is executed, and the pseudo-relation of the type Y having a high expectation degree is executed twice. Movie A (short), pseudo-repeated twice (type Y)]" and a first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. When the control is executed and the movie A (long) of the type of movie A having a long reproduction period is reproduced, the division effect is executed, and the pseudo-link of the type Y having high expectation is executed twice. Reach A out [1st pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo continuous 2 times (type Y)].

As a variation pattern type of “super reach A out”, a second pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, a split effect in which a movie A (short) of a short playback period is played back is executed, and a pseudo-run of type Y with a high degree of expectation is executed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]" and a second pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the control is executed and the movie A (long) of the type of movie A having a long reproduction period is reproduced, the division effect is executed, and the pseudo-link of the type Y having a high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of “out of reach A [second pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo two times (type Y)]”.

When the display result is "disappearance", the variation pattern of "disappearance of super reach A [first pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo continuous 2 times (type Y)]" is 1.5%. The variation pattern of “out of super reach A [first pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 1%, and “super reach A is selected. A variation pattern of "out of sync [second pattern split effect (movie A (short)), pseudo two times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and "super reach A miss [second pattern split effect. (Movie A (long)), pseudo-repeated twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of “Super reach B out”, the division effect is not executed and the pseudo-relation is not executed. The change pattern of “Super reach B out [No division effect, no pseudo-relation]” and the division effect are not executed. , A variation pattern of “super reach B deviant [no division effect, one pseudo-relation once (type X)] in which the pseudo-relation of type X with low expectation is executed once, and the division effect is not executed, and the degree of expectation is , The variation pattern of “super reach B missed [no division effect, pseudo-repetition 1 time (type Y)]” is executed once for which the type Y pseudo-relation is executed once, and the division effect is not executed and the type of low expectation A variation pattern of “super reach B out [no split effect, pseudo continuous 2 times (type X)] in which pseudo simulation of X is executed twice and a pseudo of type Y with high expectation without division effect being executed. There is a variation pattern of “out of super reach B [no division effect, pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]” in which a series is executed twice.

When the display result is "disappearance", the variation pattern of "disappearance of super reach B [no division effect, no pseudo-relation]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and "disappearance of super reach B [no division effect". , 1 pseudo run (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 2%, and the change pattern of "super reach B deviates [no division effect, 1 pseudo run (type Y)]" is 1.5. %, the variation pattern of “Super reach B is lost [No division effect, pseudo continuous 2 times (type X)] is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and “Super reach B is lost [No division effect] , Pseudo continuous 2 times (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of “super reach B out”, the first pattern effect control in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the division effect in which the movie B (short) of the type having a short reproduction period is reproduced is executed, and the pseudo-run of the type Y having a high degree of expectation is executed twice. “Super reach B deviates [first pattern division effect ( Movie B (short)), pseudo-repeated twice (type Y)]" and a first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. When the control is executed, a division effect is performed in which a movie B (long) of a type having a long reproduction period among the types of movie B is played, and a pseudo-run of type Y having a high degree of expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of “out of reach B [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]”.

As the variation pattern type of “super reach B out”, the second pattern production control in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Among them, the division effect in which the movie B (short) of the type having a short reproduction period is reproduced is executed, and the pseudo-run of the type Y having a high degree of expectation is executed twice, “Super reach B deviates [second pattern division effect ( Movie B (short)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]" and a second pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the control is executed, a division effect is performed in which a movie B (long) of a type having a long reproduction period among the types of movie B is played, and a pseudo-run of type Y having a high degree of expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of "out of reach B [second pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo continuous 2 times (type Y)]".

When the display result is "disappearance", the variation pattern of "disappearance of super reach B [first pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-repetition 2 times (type Y)]" is 1%. The variation pattern of “Out of Super Reach B [First pattern division effect (Movie B (Long)), Pseudo continuous 2 times (Type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 0.5%, and “Super Reach B” is selected. 1% of the variation patterns of "off [second pattern division effect (movie B (short), pseudo-two times (type Y)]" are selected, and "super reach B off [second pattern division effect (movie) B (long)), pseudo run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 0.5%.

(Big hit fluctuation pattern)
As the variation pattern type of "normal reach big hit", the division effect is not executed and the pseudo rendition is not executed. There is a variation pattern of “normal reach jackpot [no division effect, pseudo-repetition once (type X)] in which a low type X pseudo-run is executed once.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "normal reach big hit [no division effect, no pseudo-repeating]" is selected at a rate of 0.5%, and "normal reach big hit [no division effect, pseudo-repeating 1". Times (type X)]” is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super reach A big hit", the division effect is not executed, and the pseudo-relation is not executed. , A variation pattern of “Super reach A big hit [no division effect, one pseudo-relation once (type X)] in which a pseudo-relation of type X having a low expectation degree is executed once, and a division effect is not executed and an expectation degree The variation pattern of "Super reach A big hit [No division effect, pseudo-reaction twice (type X)]" in which the pseudo-relation of type X having a low value is executed twice and the division effect is not executed and the type of high expectation There is a variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [no division effect, pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]" in which the pseudo-repetition of Y is executed twice.

When the display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern of “Super reach A big hit [No division effect, no pseudo-relationship]” is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and “Super reach A big hit [No division effect” is selected. , Pseudo run 1 time (type X)]” is selected at a rate of 2%, and the change pattern of “super reach A big hit [no division effect, pseudo run 2 times (type X)] is 2.5. %, and the variation pattern of “Super reach A big hit [no division effect, pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)] is selected at a rate of 5%.

As a variation pattern type of "Super reach A jackpot", the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Of these, the division effect in which the movie A (short) of the type having a short reproduction period is reproduced, and the pseudo-repeat of the type Y having a high expectation degree is executed twice, “Super reach A jackpot [first pattern division effect ( Movie A (Short), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]" and a first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. When the control is executed and the movie A (long) of the type of movie A having a long reproduction period is reproduced, the division effect is executed, and the pseudo-link of the type Y having a high expectation is executed twice. Reach A big hit [first pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-repeated twice (type Y)].

As a variation pattern type of "Super Reach A jackpot", a second pattern effect control in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, a division effect in which a movie A (short) of a type having a short reproduction period is reproduced, and a pseudo-repeat of a type Y having a high expectation degree is executed twice, “Super reach A jackpot [second pattern division effect ( Movie A (short)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]" and a second pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the control is executed and the movie A (long) of the type of movie A having a long reproduction period is reproduced, the division effect is executed, and the pseudo-link of the type Y having a high expectation is executed twice. Reach A jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie A (long), pseudo-repeated twice (type Y)]”.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [first pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]" is 6%. The variation pattern of “Super reach A jackpot [1st pattern division effect (movie A (long), pseudo-repetition 2 times (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 7%, and “Super reach A jackpot [[ Second pattern division effect (movie A (short), pseudo-repeated twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 6%, and “Super reach A big hit [second pattern division effect (movie A (movie A ( Long)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super reach B big hit", the division effect is not executed and the pseudo-relation is not executed. The change pattern of "Super reach B big hit [No division effect, no pseudo-relation]" and the division effect are not executed. , A variation pattern of "Super reach B big hit [no division effect, 1 pseudo-relation once (type X)] in which the pseudo-relation of type X having a low expectation is executed once and the division effect is not executed , A variation pattern of “Super reach B big hit [No division effect, pseudo-reaction once (type Y)] is executed once, and a category Y having low expectation is not executed. A variation pattern of "Super reach B big hit [No division effect, pseudo-relation twice (type X)]" in which the pseudo-repetition of X is executed twice, and the pseudo-type of pseudo Y in which the division effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is high. There is a variation pattern of “super reach B big hit [no division effect, pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)] in which a series is executed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "Super reach B big hit [No division effect, no pseudo-relationship]" is selected at a rate of 2%, and "Super reach B big hit [No division effect, pseudo effect" is selected. The variation pattern of "1 consecutive (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and the variation pattern of "Super reach B big hit [No division effect, pseudo 1 time (type Y)]" is 3%. The change pattern of “Super reach B big hit [No division effect, pseudo-repetition 2 times (type X)]” is selected at a rate of 3%, and “Super reach B big hit [No division effect, pseudo-reation 2 Times (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variation pattern type of “Super reach B big hit”, the first pattern effect control in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the division effect in which the movie B (short) of the type having a short reproduction period is reproduced, and the pseudo-relation of the type Y having a high degree of expectation is executed twice, “Super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect ( Movie B (short)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]", and a first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. When the control is executed, a division effect is performed in which a movie B (long) of a type having a long reproduction period among the types of movie B is played, and a pseudo-run of type Y having a high degree of expectation is executed twice. Reach B big hit [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-repeated twice (type Y)].

As a variation pattern type of "Super Reach B jackpot", a second pattern effect control in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Among them, a division effect in which a movie B (short) of a type having a short reproduction period is reproduced, and a pseudo-repeat of type Y having a high expectation degree is executed twice, “Super reach B jackpot [second pattern division effect ( Movie B (short)), pseudo-repeated twice (type Y)]", and a second pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the control is executed, a division effect is performed in which a movie B (long) of a type having a long reproduction period among the types of movie B is played, and a pseudo-run of type Y having a high degree of expectation is executed twice. Reach B jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-repeated twice (type Y)]”.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach B big hit [first pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo continuous 2 times (type Y)]" is at a rate of 10%. The variation pattern of "Super reach B jackpot [1st pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-repeated 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 12%, and "Super reach B jackpot [[ 2nd pattern division effect (movie B (short), pseudo-repeated 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 10%, and "Super reach B big hit [second pattern division effect (movie B (movie B ( Long)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 12%.

As shown in FIG. 10C, when the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), the variation pattern of “super reach A out” is The selected ratio is [3.5+3+2.5+2+1.5+1+1.5+1=16%], and the selected ratio of the variation pattern of “super reach B out” is [2.5+2+1.5+1.5+1+1+0.5+1+0. 5=11.5%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the fluctuation of “super reach A big hit” The rate at which the pattern is selected is [1.5+2+2.5+5+6+7+6+7=37%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of “super reach B big hit” is selected is [2+2.5+3+3+7+10+12+10+12=61.5%].

As described above, when the variation pattern of "Super Reach B" is selected, the ratio of the display result of "Big hit" is higher than when the variation pattern of "Super Reach A" is selected. There is.

As shown in FIG. 10C, when the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is “out”), “division effect” is displayed in the variation pattern accompanied by super reach. The rate at which the variation pattern of “no execution” is selected is the rate of [super reach A (no division effect execution)+super reach B (no division effect execution)], so [(3.5+3+2.5+2)+( 2.5+2+1.5+1.5+1)=19.5%], and the rate at which the variation pattern “with division effect execution” is selected in the variation pattern with super reach is [super reach A (with division effect execution). +Super reach B (with division effect execution)], so [(1.5+1+1.5+1)+(1+0.5+1+0.5)=8%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10D, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the variation pattern with super reach is “ The rate of selecting the variation pattern of "No division effect execution" is the ratio of [Super reach A (No division effect execution) + Super reach B (No division effect execution)], so [(1.5+2+2.5+5) +(2+2.5+3+3+7)=28.5%], and the rate of selecting the variation pattern “with division effect execution” in the variation pattern with super reach is [super reach A (with division effect execution)+super Reach B (with division effect execution)], so [(6+7+6+7)+(10+12+10+12)=70%].

As described above, the display result of “big hit” is higher when the variation pattern of “with division effect execution” is selected than when the variation pattern of “without division effect execution” is selected. Has become.

As shown in FIG. 10C, when the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result specifying command is “out”), “pseudo consecutive number of times 0 (none)” The variation pattern is selected as follows: [Non-reach miss (pseudo consecutive times 0 times (none)] + normal reach miss (pseudo consecutive times 0 times (none)) + super reach A miss (pseudo consecutive times 0 times (none) ))+Super-reach B deviation (pseudo consecutive number 0 times (none))], so that [60+7+3.5+2.5=73%], and the variation pattern of “pseudo consecutive number 1” is selected. The ratio of [5.5+3+(is not normal reach (1 pseudo-repetition)+super-reach A (1 pseudo-repetition)+super-reach B (1 pseudo-repetition)] 2+1.5)=12%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of “two pseudo-repetitions” is selected is [Super-reach A is off (pseudo-repetition is 2)+Super-reach B is off (pseudo-repetition is 2). Times)], and thus [(2.5+2+1.5+1+1.5+1)+(1.5+1+1+0.5+1+0.5)=15%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), “pseudo consecutive number of times 0 (none )” variation pattern is selected as follows: [Normal reach big hit (pseudo consecutive times 0 times (none)) + super reach A big hit (pseudo consecutive times 0 times (none)) + super reach B big hit (pseudo consecutive times 0 [0.5+1.5+2=4%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of “1 pseudo-repetition number” is selected is [normal reach jackpot (1 pseudo-repetition number 1). [1+2+(2.5+3)=8.5%], which is “1+2+(2.5+3)=8.5%”. The rate of selecting the variation pattern of “2 pseudo-repetitions” is the ratio of [Super reach A big hit (2 pseudo repetitions)+Super reach B big hit (2 pseudo repetitions)]. 0.5+5+6+7+6+7)+(3+7+10+12+10+12)=87.5%].

In this way, the display result of the relationship between the variation pattern of “pseudo consecutive number 0 (none)”, the variation pattern of “pseudo consecutive number 1”, and the variation pattern of “pseudo consecutive number 2” is “ The proportion of “big hits” increases in the order of “pseudo consecutive number 0 (none)”<“pseudo consecutive number 1”<“pseudo consecutive number 2”. Therefore, the player expects that many pseudo runs will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10C, when the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result specifying command is “out”), the pseudo-run is executed, and the pseudo-run is executed. The rate of selecting the type X as the type is [5.5+3+2.5+2+1.5=14.5%], and the rate of selecting the type Y as the type of the pseudo-run is [ 2+1.5+1+1.5+1+1.5+1+1+0.5+1+0.5=12.5%].

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the pseudo-link is executed and the pseudo-link of the pseudo-link is executed. The rate at which the type X is selected as the type is [1+2+2.5+2.5+3=11%], and the rate at which the type Y is selected as the type of the pseudo-run is [5+6+7+6+7+3+7+10+12+10+12=85% ].

As described above, the variation pattern in which the type Y pseudo-relation is executed has a higher proportion of the display result of “big hit” than the variation pattern in which the type Y pseudo-relation is executed.

(Start winning award effect determination process)
FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning a prize effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-5 in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In the start winning prize effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets a set of commands at the time of starting winning prize (for example, a symbol designating command, a variable category command, based on the occurrence of the starting winning prize to the first starting winning prize opening). And the first reserved storage number addition designation command) are confirmed (step S27TM1000).

The symbol designating command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is included in the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of the big hit. CPU103, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, determines whether or not it is a jackpot, and determines the jackpot type when it is a jackpot, and designates the determination result Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern in the winning determination result. The CPU 103 determines, based on the random number for fluctuation pattern determination extracted at the time of winning the start prize, whether or not the normal reach, the super reach, and the divisional effect are executed, and the like. A variable category command that specifies the judgment result is output. Further, the first reserved storage number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved storage number has increased by one.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 displays a variation display corresponding to the starting winning based on the variation pattern determining random numbers extracted at the time of the starting winning and the variation pattern determining tables shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4. It is possible to determine the corresponding variation pattern before executing the variation display corresponding to the start winning, and to transmit the variation category command based on the determination result to the effect control CPU 120. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can confirm whether or not the divided effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize, before receiving the variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores a set of commands at the time of starting winning (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designating command) in the command storing area at the time of winning a prize. Is determined. If one set of commands for starting winning is not newly received (NO in step S27TM1000), the process ends.

If a new set of commands for starting winning is received (YES in step S27TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the divided effect based on the variation category command received from the CPU 103. Is confirmed (step S27TM1010).

If it is not determined to execute the divided effect (NO in step S27TM1010), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S27TM1030. If it is determined that the split effect is to be executed (YES in step S27TM1010), effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag (step S27TM1020) and advances the process to step S27TM1030. The change prohibition flag is set (turned on) in step S27TM1020, and is reset (turned off) at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the received command at the time of the start winning is completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S27TM1030). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the process ends. If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the final display mode of the active display is determined based on the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3A) (step). S16TM1010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the active display, and the presence/absence and the number of executions of the first change effect based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3(B)). (Step S16TM1020).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change pattern determination table of the hold display (see FIG. 9-4) (step S16TM1030), and ends the process.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-2 (1) to (4), the first hold display 27TM010 displays the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect regardless of whether the divided effect is being executed. It is displayed in the first reserved display area 27TM011 which is an area different from any of the images 27TM200, and the active display 27TM030 is displayed in the active display area 27TM031 which is an area different from both the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5, when the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S16TM1010 to step S16TM1030 to display the active display or the hold display. It is possible to execute the first change effect by determining whether to execute the first change effect that changes the aspect. On the other hand, when the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the processes in steps S16TM1010 to S16TM1030 are skipped and the process is ended as it is, so that the first change effect cannot be executed. ..

In this way, when it is determined that the split effect is to be executed in the determination at the time of starting winning, the period from the time of the starting winning to the end of the variable display that is the determination target at the time of the starting winning is held display and active. By not changing the display mode of the display, the player's interest can be directed to "whether or not the division effect is executed". Further, by not changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display while the divisional effect is being executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the divisional effect.

In addition, when it is determined that the divided effect is to be executed in the determination at the time of the start winning, during the period from the start winning concerned to before the start of the variable display which is the determination target at the start winning concerned, the hold display or the active display is performed. Although it is allowed to change the display mode of the display (although the first change effect can be executed), while the variable display accompanied by the division effect is being executed (or while the division effect is being executed), the hold display and the active display are changed. The display mode may not be changed (the first change effect may be disabled).

If the display mode of the active display is changed while the division effect is being executed, depending on the modes of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200, and the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes, Since it is possible for the player to easily understand which of the left and right images is the first effect image 27TM100 (that is, whether the image is a true image for the player), at least the divided effect is executed. It is preferable that the active effect targeted for active display is not executed during the period in which the active display is performed.

On the other hand, during the execution of the variable display accompanied by the division effect (or during the execution of the division effect), the display mode of the hold display is not changed, but the display mode of the active display may be changed. .. For example, it is possible to change the display mode of the active display, which is the correspondence information corresponding to the variable display accompanied by the split effect, so that the active display changes to what mode by executing the split effect. The player can be made interested in what to do.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 may have an effect configuration capable of executing the effect effect that acts on the hold display or the active display. For example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display hit by the ball may change in accordance with the execution of the action effect in which the ball thrown by the character hits the hold display or the active display.

When it is determined that the divided effect is to be executed in the determination of the start winning, the effect is not executed during the period from the start winning to the end of the variable display which is the determination target of the starting winning. You can

In addition, when it is determined that the divided effect is executed by the determination at the time of starting winning, the action effect is executed during the period from the time of the starting winning to the start of the variable display which is the determination target at the time of the starting winning. Although it is possible, the action effect may not be executed during execution of the variable display accompanied by the divided effect (or during execution of the divided effect).

In addition, when it is determined in the determination at the time of starting winning to execute the divided effect, the period from the time of the starting winning to the end of the variable display which is the determination target at the time of the starting winning, the hold display and the active display are displayed. The effect may be executable while the display mode is not changed (the first change effect is inexecutable). For example, although the action effect in which the ball thrown by the character hits the hold display or the active display is executed, as a result, the display mode of the hold display or the active display hit by the ball may not change.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the period during which the split effect is executed during the variable display is displayed as the hold display or the active display, as compared with the period during which the divided effect is not executed during the variable display. The execution ratio of the effect that changes the mode (the effect that acts on the hold display or the active display) is low.

(Specific example of production video)
Next, a specific example of the effect animation will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of [Movie A] which is an example of the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the division effect is executed, and FIG. -7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of [Movie B] which is an example of the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the divided effect is executed.

As described above, when the split effect is executed in the present embodiment, a predetermined movie image corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. Then, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

(Specific example of movie A)
As shown in FIG. 10-6(1), when the division effect is executed by the CPU 120 for effect control, in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is displayed. Is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(2), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the second decorative symbol “2” in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2, and the second symbol display area 5C2. While temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300, a white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in each of the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2. The second decorative pattern at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the second decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <second decorative pattern.

In the example in which the movie A is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, when the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, the pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A to be described later is not displayed, and the type X (expected Low) is being executed. Further, in the example in which the movie A is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A is not in the mode (blue or red) of suggesting the set value like the fourth setting suggestive effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(3), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the first re-variation display of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Let it run.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(4), the CPU 120 for effect control stops the second decorative symbol “2” in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. The reach state is brought about by displaying, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper part of the second effect image 27TM200.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 operates the push button 31B and the operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B in the central portion of the second effect image 27TM200 while continuing the reach state. And a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period in which is valid. Since the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decorative pattern, they are displayed by the player in front of the background image and the decorative pattern. It looks like

In the present embodiment, the time bar 27TM360 displays 100% of the remaining time at the initially displayed timing, and the ratio of the remaining time gradually decreases as time passes, and the operation prompting display 27TM350 is displayed. At the end timing, the remaining time is displayed as 0%.

However, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are merely objects in the movie corresponding to the variation pattern. Actually, the operation of the push button 31B is not valid even during the display period of the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and the operation is not detected by the operation detecting means of the push sensor 35B.

In the present embodiment, when the time bar 27TM360 is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, the push button 31B is operated by the player at the timing when the remaining time of the time bar 27TM360 becomes 20%, as described later. Regardless of whether it is actually performed, an effect image imitating a mode of cut-in notice effect described later is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(5), in response to the lapse of a predetermined period from the time bar 27TM360 being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar 27TM360 to the remaining 25%. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(6), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 20%, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the player has actually operated the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the cut-in image 27TM370A is displayed, the characters "Chance?" are displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. However, the cut-in image displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the variation pattern. The cut-in image 27TM370A is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

In this way, at the timing when the remaining operation valid period suggested by the time bar 27TM360 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 becomes the predetermined period (20% remaining), the cut-in image is displayed regardless of the actual operation. Will be displayed. That is, when the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the push button 31B is actually operated, and the same effect as when the operation is detected by the operation detecting unit of the push sensor 35B is executed. Become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(7), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the character "battle" as the second effect image 27TM200, and displays the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A). Display the image of the battle production. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed in the lower center part of the image of the battle effect together with the characters “expectation degree”, and the number of the object images 27TM550 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. There is. However, the object image 27TM550 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the variation pattern.

(Specific example of movie B)
As shown in FIG. 10-7(1), when the division effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), the CPU 120 for effect control displays a second decorative symbol “2” in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2, and a second symbol display area 5C2. While temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300, a white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in each of the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2. The second decorative pattern at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the second decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <second decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the pseudo effect effect image 27TM300A to be displayed as the second effect image 27TM200.

In the example in which the movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the pseudo-relation effect image 27TM300A is displayed when the pseudo-relational pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the type Y (highly expected) of the types of pseudo-relation. Pseudo rendition of is being executed. In addition, in the example in which the movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A is not in the mode (blue or red) of suggesting the set value like the fourth setting suggestive effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(4), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the first re-variation display of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Let it run.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (5), the CPU 120 for effect control stops the second decorative symbol “5” in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. The reach state is brought about by displaying, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper part of the second effect image 27TM200.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 operates the push button 31B and the operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B in the central portion of the second effect image 27TM200 while continuing the reach state. And a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period in which is valid. Since the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decorative pattern, they are displayed by the player in front of the background image and the decorative pattern. It looks like

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(6), the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar 27TM360 to the remaining 25% in response to the lapse of a predetermined period from the time bar 27TM360 being displayed. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(7), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 20%, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the player has actually operated the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed, the characters "Chance!" are displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. The cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(8), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the character "battle" as the second effect image 27TM200, and displays the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A). Display the image of the battle production. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed in the lower center part of the image of the battle effect together with the characters “expectation degree”, and the number of the object images 27TM550 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. There is.

(Playback control of direction video)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-2 and FIG. 10-3, [Movie A (Short)] is used as the effect animation that can be reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200 corresponding to the variation pattern accompanied by the division effect. , [Movie A (long)], [movie B (short)], and [movie B (long)]. FIG. 10-8 is a time chart showing the reproduction period of each effect moving image when the divided effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, when [Movie A (Short)] is selected as the effect movie type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie A] (timing T0). ), after the effect image of [movie A] shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 10-6 is displayed, the display of the effect image of [movie A] is ended (timing TA1). Further, when [Movie A (long)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts the display of the effect image of [Movie A] (timing of T0), and FIG. After displaying the effect image of [movie A] shown in 1) to (7), the display of the effect image of [movie A] is ended (timing TA2).

Here, the effect image of [movie A (short)] (FIGS. 10-6(1) to (3)) and the effect image of the first half of [movie A (long)] (FIGS. 10-6(1) to (3)) 3)) is common. Therefore, reproduction of [movie A (short)] is sufficient by executing control for reproducing the first half of [movie A (long)]. Therefore, the effect data regarding [movie A (long)] is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern designation command to the first half of [movie A (long)]. Display control of only [movie A (short) is played] or display control of the whole part (full) of [movie A (long)] is performed ([movie A (long)]. )] is determined to be reproduced), and display control is executed based on the determination, so that two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

When [Movie B (short)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie B] (timing of T0), and FIG. After the effect image of [movie B] shown in 1) to (4) is displayed, the display of the effect image of [movie B] is ended (timing TB1). When [Movie B (long)] is selected as the type of effect movie, the effect control CPU 120 starts the display of the effect image of [Movie B] (timing of T0), and FIG. After displaying the effect image of [movie B] shown in 1) to (8), the display of the effect image of [movie B] is ended (timing TB2).

Here, the effect images of [movie B (short)] (FIGS. 10-7(1) to (4)) and the effect images of the first half of [movie B (long)] (FIGS. 10-7(1) to (4)) 4)) is common. Therefore, reproduction of [movie B (short)] is sufficient by executing control for reproducing the first half of [movie B (long)]. Therefore, the effect data regarding [movie B (long)] is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern designating command to the first half of [movie B (long)]. Display control of only [movie B (short) is played] or display control of the whole part (full) of [movie B (long)] is performed ([movie B (long)]. )] is determined to be reproduced), and display control is executed based on the determination, so that two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, by providing a plurality of end timings for one effect moving image stored in the ROM 121, it is not necessary to store an individual effect moving image for each variation pattern involving divisional effects. It is possible to prevent the storage capacity of effect data from increasing excessively. Further, by making the end timing of one effect moving image different according to the variation pattern, it is possible to make the player appear as if a plurality of effect moving images are prepared.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3 and FIG. 10-4, when the display result is “out”, the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie A (short)” is [1.5+1.5]=3%, and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of “movie A (long)” is [1+1]=2%, while the display result is “big hit” In this case, the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie A (short)” is [6+6]=12%, and the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie A (long)” is [7+7]=14. %. Therefore, the percentage of big hits is higher when the variation pattern of “movie A (long)” is selected than when the variation pattern of “movie A (short)” is selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is “out”, the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie B (short)” is [1+1]=2%, and the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie B (long)” is [0.5+0.5]=1%, whereas the display result is “big hit” In this case, the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie B (short)” is [10+10]=20%, and the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie B (long)” is [12+12]=24. %. Therefore, the jackpot is higher when the variation pattern of “movie B (long)” is selected than when the variation pattern of “movie B (short)” is selected.

Therefore, when "Movie A" is played, the longer the playing period is (the later the end timing is), the higher the jackpot expectation is, and when "Movie B" is played, the playing period is longer. The higher (the later the end timing is), the higher the jackpot expectation. By performing such effect control, the player, once the divided effect is executed (when the movie is once reproduced), the divided effect continues as long as possible (the movie is reproduced as long as possible). Come to expect that.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is “out”, the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie A” is [1.5+1+1]. .5+1]=5%, and the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie B” is [1+0.5+1+0.5]=3%, while the display result is “big hit” , The rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie A” is [6+7+6+7]=26%, and the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “movie B” is [10+12+10+12]=44%. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the case where the movie B, which is the effect movie having a relatively long reproduction period, is reproduced, as compared with the case where the movie A, which is the effect animation having a relatively short reproduction period, is reproduced. However, the percentage of big hits is high.

Therefore, the player comes to expect that the movie B will be reproduced rather than the movie A, that is, the effect moving image having a relatively long reproduction period will be reproduced when the divided effect is executed.

Note that, in the present embodiment, an example in which the longer the reproduction period of the effect video is, the higher the jackpot expectation degree is, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. May be higher. In addition, it is also possible to have an effect configuration in which the reproduction period of the effect movie and the big hit expectation degree are not related (the big hit expectation degree does not change depending on the end timing of the effect animation).

(Specific example of pseudo continuous production)
As described above, as the pseudo continuous effect shown in the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect of type X (hereinafter, also referred to as pseudo continuous effect [X: weak]) and a pseudo continuous effect of type Y (hereinafter, pseudo continuous effect [ Y: strong]). The ratio of the display result of "big hit" is higher when the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed than when the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] is executed. A specific example of the pseudo continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-9 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B4).

FIGS. 10-9(A1) to (A3) are explanatory views showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo-relational effect [X: weak] is executed, and FIG. (B1)-(B4) is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed.

(Specific example of pseudo continuous production [X: weak])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (A1), when the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, The variable display of the decorative design (information corresponding to the first special design) is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small design (corresponding to the first special design). (Variable information) is displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “3”, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol of "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak]. Each is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbols to be re-varied in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

(Specific example of pseudo continuous production [Y: strong])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (B1), when the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, The variable display of the decorative design (information corresponding to the first special design) is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small design (corresponding to the first special design). Information) that is displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “3”, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol of "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong]. Each is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), the CPU 120 for effect control temporarily suspends the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, and the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 in the symbol display area 5C. In this state, the pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern including the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the pseudo continuous effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the pseudo continuous effect image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground). Has been done. That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern including the pseudo continuous pattern, the pseudo continuous effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <pseudo continuous effect image <decorative pattern.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect in response to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong], and moves the movable body 27TM600 from the tilted position to the standing position. In this example, the movable body 27TM600 is moved to the standing position, so that the movable body 27TM600 is located in front of the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300. That is, since the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 related to the pseudo continuous effect and the movable body 27TM600 after the operation have a corresponding positional relationship, the pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A is an effect image corresponding to the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 and the standing position. It is also an effect image corresponding to the movable body 27TM600 in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 causes the movable body 27TM600 to be displayed while the decorative symbol re-variation display is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The movable-body effect is ended by operating from the standing position to the tilted position.

In this way, when the pseudo-relational effect [X: weak] is executed, the pseudo-relational effect image 27TM300A is not displayed after the pseudo-relational pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the movable body effect is executed. Instead, the re-variation display of the decorative pattern is executed. On the other hand, when the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed, the pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed after the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the movable body 27TM600 moves from the tilted position to the standing position. .. Next, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed again, and the movable body 27TM600 moves from the standing position to the tilted position.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 10-9, in the state where the division effect is not executed, the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Although the example of being executed has been described, the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] and the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] are the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image when the divided effect is being executed. It can be executed in at least one of the display areas 27TM200A.

That is, with the execution of the division effect, in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as the ornament identification information is executed, and the first thereof. Based on the decorative pattern, there is a case where either the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. In addition, in accordance with the execution of the division effect, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as the decorative identification information is executed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200, and the second thereof. Based on the decorative pattern, there is a case where either the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed.

However, in the present embodiment, in the state where the split effect is not executed (the example shown in FIG. 10-9), the pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A corresponds to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong]. Is displayed and the movable body effect is executed, but in the state where the divided effect is executed (the example shown in FIG. 10-7), the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. In response to this, although the pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, the movable body effect is not executed.

(Outline of setting suggestion production)
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can execute a third setting suggesting effect and a fourth setting suggesting effect as setting suggesting effects that suggest setting values of the gaming machine. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a third setting suggestion effect and a fourth setting suggestion effect in addition to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect described in [Feature 16TM]. Is also possible.

The third setting suggestive effect and the fourth setting suggestive effect are timings at which the decorative symbols stop in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the divisional effects are not executed (pseudo continuous in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By including the timing at which the symbol is temporarily stopped), the aspect of the effect image displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is determined at different ratios according to the set value, and thus, depending on the aspect of the displayed effect image. It is a performance that suggests a set value.

Further, the third setting suggestive effect and the fourth setting suggestive effect are timings at which the first decorative symbol stops in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 when the divisional effect is executed (first symbol display area). 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 includes the timing at which the pseudo-relational symbols are temporarily stopped), and the aspect of the effect image displayed in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is determined at different rates according to the set value. Is an effect that suggests a set value according to the mode of the displayed effect image.

In the present embodiment, (i) when the variation pattern is "non-reach", the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect can be executed at the timing when the decorative pattern stops. (Ii) When the variation pattern is “normal reach or super reach without pseudo-relation”, the timing when the same decorative design is stopped in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R and the reach state is reached (in the case of accompanied by division effect) Is a timing at which the same first decorative symbol is stopped in the first symbol display areas 5L1 and 5R1 and is in the reach state), the third setting suggestive effect or the fourth setting suggestive effect can be executed. (Iii) When the variation pattern is “normal reach or super reach with pseudo-relation”, the timing at which the pseudo-relational pattern is first temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C (when accompanied by division effects, the first symbol display) It is possible to execute the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect at the timing when the pseudo-relational pattern is temporarily stopped in the area 5C1).

The decorative pattern (including the pseudo continuous pattern) when the third setting suggesting effect or the fourth setting suggesting effect is executed has a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is seen by the player). It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in front. That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern (including the pseudo continuous pattern), the effect image, and the background image when the third setting suggestive effect or the fourth setting suggestive effect is executed is as follows: background image <effect image <decorative pattern It is getting higher in order.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the third setting suggestive effect is executed, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (when the divided effect is executed, the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1) is an effect image displayed in gold, and when the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (when the division effect is executed, the first symbol display area 5L1, The effect image displayed on 5C1, 5R1) becomes blue or red.

Further, in the present embodiment, when neither the third setting suggestion effect nor the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (the first symbol display area 5L1 when the divisional effect is executed). , 5C1, 5R1) are white.

In this way, by displaying the setting suggestion information (effect image) that suggests the setting value corresponding to the stop position of the decorative pattern, the player displays not only the stopped decorative pattern but also the decorative pattern. We will also pay attention to the setting suggestion information.

In addition, in the first embodiment, setting suggestion is not performed in the second effect image 27TM200, and the image related to the third setting suggestive effect and the fourth effect are used as images in the movie reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200. None of the images related to the setting suggestion effect are displayed. Therefore, the effect image of the decorative design displayed in the second design display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 is white.

(Outline of cut-in notice production)
Next, a notice effect for giving a notice that the jackpot game state is controlled will be described. In this example, a cut-in notice effect can be executed as the notice effect. The cut-in notice production is a notice production that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 10-13 (2) to (4), which will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 establishes a reach state with the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the divisional effect is not executed. In the middle of the screen of the image display device 5, the operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effective are notified. The time bar 27TM360 is displayed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the screen. .. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire central area in the vertical direction of the screen. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode with a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decorative pattern, and letters "REACH!!").

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120, when the division effect is being executed, when the reach state is established in the first decorative symbols of the first symbol display areas 5L1 and 5R1, At the center of the effect image display area 27TM100A, an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid. Display it.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the push button 31B being operated by the player when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Execute cut-in notice production. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire central area in the vertical direction of the first effect image display area 27TM100A. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decorative pattern, and characters of “reach!!”) in first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(Variation start effect determination process)
CPU103, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation command for designating the display result, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern, and the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation Command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved) for designating that the reserved storage number has been subtracted Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (big hit or off, big hit type in case of big hit), and variable display period of special symbol and effect contents Based on the fact that a set of commands, a variation pattern designation command for designating (reach and super reach, etc.), is received from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), the variable display of special symbols is executed, In addition, the variable display period of special symbols and the effect contents (reach, super reach, etc.) can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the special symbol (the first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished and the display result is derived.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the split effect is executed and the movie type of the split effect (movie A (short), movie A (long), movie B (short), movie B (long)), and The number of pseudo-repetitions (0, 1, 2) and the pseudo-reaction type (type X, type Y) are designated. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120, based on the received variation pattern designating command, corresponds to the variation display of the decorative pattern to be executed, whether or not to execute the division effect, and the division effect when the division effect is executed. It is possible to determine the mode, and it is also possible to determine the number of pseudo runs and the mode of the pseudo run when executing the pseudo run.

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing the variation start time effect determination process. In this variation start time effect determination process, whether or not to execute each of the third setting suggestion effect, the fourth setting suggestion effect, and the cut-in notice effect is determined.

The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands (the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, the display result designation command, and the variation pattern designation command) accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol. , A production control pattern for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol based on the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command (control for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) (Collection of data) is set, and the effect to be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is determined by the variation start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-10.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value is "6" (that is, the set value designated by the set value designation command is "6") (step S27TM2000). When the set value is not "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is not "6") (NO in step S27TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S27TM2030. ..

When the setting value is "6" (that is, when the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is "6") (YES in step S27TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 causes the third setting suggesting effect Whether or not to execute is determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table (see FIG. 10-11(A)) of the third setting suggestive effect, and the process proceeds to step S27TM2020.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the execution setting determination table of the third setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the third setting suggestion effect is executed only when the set value is “6”. A value has been assigned. When the setting value is “6” (that is, when the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is “6”), the effect control CPU 120 has a third setting suggesting effect at a rate of 99.5%. Is determined not to be executed, and the third setting suggestion effect is determined to be executed at a rate of 0.5%.

In this way, only when the setting value is "6" (that is, only when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6"), the presence/absence of execution of the third setting suggestive effect is determined. The third setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. When the third setting suggestion effect is executed, it is decided that the setting value set for the gaming machine is “6”, so that the player executes the third setting suggestion effect. There will be a great deal of interest in whether or not the effect image of the decorative pattern will be displayed in gold.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the third setting suggestion effect (step S27TM2020). When it is determined to execute the third setting suggestion effect (YES in step S27TM2020), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S27TM2040.

When it is not determined to execute the third setting suggestion effect (NO in step S27TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the fourth setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode. The determination is made based on the table (see FIG. 10-11(B)), and the process proceeds to step S27TM2040.

As illustrated in FIG. 10-11(B), in the fourth setting suggestion effect execution presence/absence determination table, determination for determining the presence/absence of execution of the fourth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode according to the set value that is set. A value has been assigned.

Production control CPU120, when the setting value is any of "1", "3", "5" (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is "1", "3", "5"). In either case), it is determined that the fourth setting suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 30%, and the fourth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is executed at a rate of 40%. It is determined to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of %.

Production control CPU120, when the set value is any of "2", "4", "6" (that is, the set value designated by the set value designation command is "2", "4", "6"). In either case), it is decided not to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, and it is decided to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 30%. It is determined to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of %.

In this way, when the setting value is any of "1", "3", and "5" (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is any of "1", "3", and "5"). In that case), the ratio of the effect image of the decorative design displayed in blue is higher than the ratio of the effect image of the decorative design displayed in red. On the other hand, if the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6" (that is, if the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "2", "4", or "6"). In some cases), the ratio of the decorative design effect image displayed in red is higher than the ratio of the decorative design effect image displayed in blue.

Therefore, the fourth setting suggestion effect in which the blue effect image is displayed is an effect indicating that the setting value is an odd number (the setting value is any one of "1", "3", and "5"). There is. Further, the fourth setting suggestion effect in which the red effect image is displayed is an effect that suggests that the setting value is an even number (the setting value is any one of “2”, “4”, and “6”). There is. As described above, the fourth setting suggestion effect is an even-odd suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is “non-reach out” (step S27TM2040). When the variation pattern is “out of reach” (YES in step S27TM2040), CPU 120 for effect control ends the process as it is.

When the variation pattern is not "non-reach out" (NO in step S27TM2040), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed and the effect mode to determine whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed (FIG. 10-11). (See (C)) (step S27TM2050), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(C), in the cut-in notice effect execution presence/absence determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode are determined in accordance with the display result designated by the display result designation command. The judgment value for is assigned.

When the display result is “out”, the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 80%, and cut-in image 27TM370A (called “chance?” at a rate of 15%). (Cut-in image with characters displayed) Decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, and display cut-in image 27TM370B (cut-in image with the characters "Chance!") at a rate of 8%. To execute the cut-in preview effect, and execute the cut-in preview effect that displays the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image in which the characters "Great chance!!" are displayed) at a rate of 2%. To decide.

When the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%, and the cut-in image 27TM370A (called "chance?") at a rate of 15%. (Cut-in image with characters displayed) Decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, and display the cut-in image 27TM370B (cut-in image with the characters "Chance!") at a rate of 20%. It is decided to execute the cut-in preview effect, and to execute the cut-in preview effect that displays the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image in which the characters "Great chance!!" are displayed) at a rate of 25%. To decide.

(Specific example of third setting suggestive effect)
Next, a specific example of the third setting suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (A1) to (A3). FIGS. 10-12(A1) to (A3) show the case where the set value is “6” (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is “6”), and the variation pattern is “6”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which 3rd setting suggestion production is performed at the timing (timing of (i) mentioned above) when a decorative design is a change pattern of "non-reach out".

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), when the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, The variable display of the decorative design (information corresponding to the first special design) is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small design (corresponding to the first special design). (Variable information) is displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “3”, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A2), based on the fact that the variation pattern is “out of reach”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result as “out” in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The non-reach decorative pattern combination (“247” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the third setting suggestion effect is executed, and the golden effect images 27TM400D are respectively displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display it.

The decorative pattern at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that the player can see this in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative pattern. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and the first small symbol in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of symbols is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A3), the effect control CPU 120, which has received a command from the main board 11 to specify and stop the decorative symbol, is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition to ending the third setting suggestion effect by erasing the golden effect image 27TM400D, the variable display result of the first special symbol corresponds to “out”, and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. , The combination of decorative patterns (“247” in this example) whose display result is “disappear” is fixedly stopped. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets "247" in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r based on the fact that the combination of decorative symbols to be fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is "247". The combination of the first small symbols is fixedly stopped.

(Specific example of the fourth setting suggestive effect)
Next, a specific example of the fourth setting suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B3). FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B3) show the case where the setting value is “6” (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is “6”) and the variation pattern is “ An example in which the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the pseudo-relational pattern is temporarily stopped (the timing (iii) described above) when the variation pattern is “normal reach or super reach with type X pseudo-relationship”. It is an explanatory view shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), when the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, The variable display of the decorative design (information corresponding to the first special design) is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small design (corresponding to the first special design). (Variable information) is displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “3”, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B2), based on the fact that the variation pattern is “normal reach or super reach with type X pseudo-relation”, the effect control CPU 120 causes the pseudo-relation production [X: weak]. Along with the execution, the decorative symbols of "2" are temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, respectively, and the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, and the fourth setting suggesting effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the red effect images 27TM400C in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively, based on the decision to execute the fourth mode suggestive effect in the red mode. Let

The decorative pattern at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that the player can see this in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative pattern. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and the first small symbol in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of symbols is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B3), the effect control CPU 120, which has received a command from the main board 11 for designating the decorative symbol to be fixedly stopped, is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. By erasing the red effect image 27TM400C, the fourth setting suggesting effect is ended, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed again in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and the first small symbol in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of symbols is continued.

(Specific example of cut-in notice production)
Next, a specific example of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 10-13(1) to (4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

Further, in FIGS. 10 to 13, the mode of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right part of the effect drawing in association with the effect drawing. The push button mode includes a blinking mode that indicates that the operation of the push button 31B is valid and a normal mode (extinguishing mode) that indicates that the operation of the push button 31B is not effective. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-13(1), when the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, The variable display of the decorative design (information corresponding to the first special design) is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small design (corresponding to the first special design). (Variable information) is displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “3”, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

When the effect image shown in FIG. 10-13(1) is displayed on the image display device 5, the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are not displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is enabled. In response to this, the push button 31B is in the normal mode (light-out mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13(2), the effect control CPU 120 sets the reach state by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , "REACH!!" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 operates the push button 31B and the operation prompt display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 while continuing the reach state. And a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period in which is valid. Since the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decorative pattern, they are displayed by the player in front of the background image and the decorative pattern. It looks like

The effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and responds to the operation of the push button 31B being valid (corresponding to the start of the operation valid period). The push button 31B is switched from the normal mode (light off mode) to the blink mode.

Although the operation of the push button 31B is valid (even within the operation valid period), in the operation standby state in which the operation of the push button 31B has not been detected by the push sensor 35B, the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360. Is continuously displayed. The time bar 27TM360 displays 100% of the remaining time at the initially displayed timing, and the ratio of the remaining time gradually decreases as the time in the operation standby state elapses. In this operation standby state, the push button 31B is in a blinking mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13(3), the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 25% in response to the lapse of a predetermined period in the operation standby state. Then, the push button 31B continues to be in a blinking mode in response to the operation standby state.

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the push button 31B within the operation valid period before the remaining display of the time bar 27TM360 becomes 0%. At this time, the operation of the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B, so that the operation standby state ends. The effect control CPU 120 hides (erases) the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 in response to the end of the operation standby state, and switches the push button 31B from the blinking mode to the normal mode (extinguishing mode). Switch to. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-13(4), the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B detected by the push sensor 35B within the operation valid period.

In the example of the cut-in notice effect shown in FIG. 10-13(4), the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the character "Chance!" is displayed is displayed in the entire central area of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction of the screen. .. The cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images (the background image, the decorative pattern, and the letters “REACH!!”). Further, when the cut-in image is displayed, the push button 31B is pressed in response to the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid (corresponding to the operation being completed within the valid operation period). It is in a normal mode (light-out mode).

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is displayed, the player suddenly has a display mode with a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and is related to the other effect). Since a cut-in image is displayed (which seems to be displayed on the front side of the image), it is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. Further, since there are a plurality of cut-in images as in the present embodiment, it becomes interesting to know which cut-in image is displayed.

(Setting suggestion effect during split effect execution)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A while the divided effect is being executed, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. The setting suggestion effect is not executed in. An example of effects in this case will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 12-19.

FIG. 10-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the divided effect is executed, and FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19 are effect images of each effect when the divided effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example.

In this example, at the start of the variation of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is such that the effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen is executed. At the same time, a division effect is performed in which a movie B (long) of a type having a long playback period is played among the types of movie B, and a pseudo-run of type Y having a high degree of expectation is executed twice. 1 pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]".

CPU120 for production control, the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern command in which the variation pattern of "super reach B big hit [first pattern division production (movie B (long), pseudo-two times (type Y)]" is specified. The variable display of is executed. In this variation pattern, in the period in which the divided effect is being executed, after the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed twice in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, as a super-reach effect, an ally A battle effect B that informs whether or not the jackpot is won is executed by the battle between the character and the enemy character B, and based on the movie B (long) in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the screen. The effect image will be displayed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode in the variation start effect determination process (step S27TM2030), and the cut-in in which the character "Great chance!!" is displayed. It is assumed that it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect that displays the image 27TM370C (step S27TM2050).

In FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the form of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right part of the effect diagram in association with the effect diagram. The push button mode includes a blinking mode that indicates that the operation of the push button 31B is valid and a normal mode (extinguishing mode) that indicates that the operation of the push button 31B is not effective. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-15(1), when the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of 5, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. , The small display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “3”, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-15(1), in the state where the division effect is not executed and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the cut-in notice effect is performed. The push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguished mode) in response to the fact that it is not the timing to execute (it is not the timing to display the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360).

As shown in FIG. 10-15(2), the effect control CPU 120 starts the divisional effect at a timing (T2 shown in FIG. 10-14) when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. In this example, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A set on the right part of the effect display area 27TM005A based on the effect control of the first pattern being executed, and effect display is performed. The second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A set to the left of the area 27TM005A.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image display area 27TM100A with the start of the divisional effect. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes [movie B] to be reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A with the start of the division effect. Therefore, an effect image based on [Movie B] is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. At this time, based on the reproduced [movie B], the variable display of the second decorative symbol is executed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2.

In addition, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol being continuously executed, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5 to display the first small symbol. The fluctuation display of is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-15(2) and subsequent figures, in the state where the divisional effect is being executed, regardless of whether or not it is the timing to execute the cut-in notice effect (operation prompting display 27TM350 and time bar 27TM360). The push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) regardless of whether or not it is time to display.

As shown in FIG. 10-15(3), the CPU 120 for effect control has the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing at which the first pseudo-representative effect [Y: strong] should be executed. Then, the first decorative pattern of "3" is temporarily stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-14). Then, the pseudo symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1 and the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode is executed (timing T4 shown in FIGS. 10-14). That is, a red effect image 27TM400C is displayed in each of the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1.

At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control, at a predetermined timing when the first pseudo-reproduction is executed by the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol of "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2. Are temporarily stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-14). Then, the pseudo symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the second symbol display area 5C2, and a white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in each of the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 (timing T4 shown in FIGS. 10-14). ).

In this way, when it is determined that neither the third setting suggestion effect nor the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed as the second effect image 27TM200 based on the [movie B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. An effect image imitating the effect will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the red effect image 27TM400C in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 in the pseudo continuous effect [Y. : Strong] is executed, the pseudo effect image 27TM300A is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A (timing T5 shown in FIGS. 10-14). At this time, the pseudo-sequential effect image 27TM300A is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image 27TM400C (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground).

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the pseudo effect image 27TM300A in the second effect image display area 27TM200A in a state where the white effect image 27TM400A is continuously displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2. (T5 timing shown in FIG. 10-14).

Thus, as the second effect image 27TM200 based on [Movie B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, an effect image imitating the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), when the divisional effect is not executed, the pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed in response to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong]. While the movable body effect in which the movable body 27TM600 operates is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-16(4), when the divided effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. Correspondingly, although the pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, the movable body effect is not executed.

In the pseudo continuous effect when the division effect is not executed, since the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C and the movable body 27TM600 in the standing position corresponding to the movement are in the corresponding positional relationship, the game is played. The person can easily understand that the movable body effect is executed corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong].

On the other hand, if the movable body effect is executed along with the pseudo continuous effect while the split effect is being executed, the operation of the movable body 27TM600 will be one of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200. It is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it corresponds to. Further, the movable body 27TM600 in the standing position further reduces the visibility of the effect images displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, which are smaller than the effect display area 27TM005A. Further, it is necessary to set which of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 the movable object control command for controlling the operation of the movable object 27TM600 is associated with, which complicates the effect control. To do.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the divisional effect is being executed, the pseudo effect effect image 27TM300A is displayed, but the movable object effect is not executed. Here, as the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed, the pseudo continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed in the same manner as when the divided effect is not executed. : Strong] has been executed, but the movable body 27TM600 does not operate.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the re-variation display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (T6 in FIG. 10-14). timing). Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the re-variation display of the second decorative symbol based on [Movie B] in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 (timing T6 shown in FIG. 10-14). ..

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (6), the CPU 120 for effect control has the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing at which the second pseudo-representative effect [Y: strong] should be executed. Then, the first decorative pattern of "3" is temporarily stopped (timing of T7 shown in FIG. 10-14). Then, the pseudo symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1 (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 10-14).

At this time, effect control CPU 120 displays the image in the reach state based on [movie B] in second effect image display area 27TM200A. In this example, the second decorative symbol "2" is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2, respectively, so that the reach state is reached, and "Reach!" is displayed above the second effect image display area 27TM200A. "!" and the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the second effect image display area 27TM200A (timing T7 shown in FIG. 10-14).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-16(6) to 10-17(8), in the state where the division effect is being executed, regardless of whether or not the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. The push button 31B is in the normal mode (light out mode). Here, in FIG. 10-16(6), the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and these are only displayed as images in the movie. Absent. Therefore, the operation valid period is not actually reached, and even if the player operates the push button 31B, the execution control of the cut-in notice effect is not performed in response to the operation.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo effect effect image 27TM300A in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in response to the execution of the pseudo effect effect [Y: strong]. It is displayed (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 10-14). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is the effect image based on [Movie B], is updated to the remaining 50%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(8), the effect control CPU 120 executes the re-variation display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (T10 shown in FIG. 10-14). timing). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is an effect image based on [Movie B], is updated to the remaining 25%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(9), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the first decorative symbol “3” in the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Reaching is achieved by stopping and displaying each, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed above the first effect image display area 27TM100A, and the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Is displayed (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120, regardless of whether the push button 31B is operated, at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 of the second effect image display area 27TM200A is updated to the remaining 20%, regardless of whether the push button 31B is operated or not. The cut-in image 27TM370B in which the character "!" is displayed is displayed in the center of the second effect image display area 27TM200A in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images being displayed (see FIGS. 10-14). (T11 timing shown). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, a cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed as an effect image based on [Movie B].

At the timing of T11 shown in FIGS. 10-14, the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed based on the fact that the cut-in notice presentation corresponding to the first effect image display area 27TM100A is determined to be executed. At the same time, the operation period is entered. By operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period, the cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. However, in the state where the division effect is being executed, the push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguished mode) regardless of whether the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. In the example shown in 17(9), the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguished mode) despite the operation valid period.

In the present embodiment, when the divisional effect is not executed, the push button 31B changes from the normal mode (extinguished mode) to the flashing mode in response to the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 being displayed. Along with this, the operation period is entered. Then, a cut-in image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 27TM005A in response to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation valid period (see FIGS. 10 to 13).

On the other hand, when the division effect is being executed, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the side of the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the push button 31B flashes from the normal mode (light off mode). The push button 31B shifts to the operation valid period in the normal mode (light-out mode) without changing to (see FIG. 10-17(9)). Then, a cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A corresponding to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation valid period (see FIG. 10-18 (10) described later).

Further, when the division effect is being executed, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the second effect image display area 27TM200A side, the push button 31B blinks from the normal mode (light off mode). Does not change to the operation valid period (see FIG. 10-16(6)). Then, the cut-in image is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A at a predetermined timing regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated.

That is, during the period in which the division effect is executed, regardless of whether or not the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed, and whether or not the operation of the push button 31B is enabled, The player can easily understand which of the left and right images is the first effect image 27TM100 (whether it is a true effect) by keeping the push button 31B in the normal mode (extinguished mode). You can't.

In the present embodiment, during the execution of the divided effect, the operation promotion effect in which the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A. Although the executable example has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and while the divided effect is being executed, the operation promotion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. Then, the operation promotion effect may not be executed.

Further, unlike the above example, the operation promotion effect may not be executed in any of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A during execution of the divided effect. For example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern involving divisional production, the effect control CPU 120 causes the variation start time production determination process to select a preliminary production involving operation promotion production. Instead, another type of notice effect may be selected. That is, the type of the notice effect that can be executed when the divided effect is not executed includes the notice effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect, but the type of the notice effect that can be executed when the divided effect is executed is included. May not include the notice effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the divisional effect is not executed, the push button 31B switches from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the lighting mode when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. When the divisional effect is being executed, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguished mode) when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. Therefore, the light emitting device for changing the mode of the push button 31B (for example, the LED that is installed inside the housing of the push button 31B and emits light during the operation valid period) is an effect corresponding to the period in which the divided effect is not executed. It can be called a device.

In this way, the effect device corresponding to the period in which the divided effect is not executed may not be operated during the variable display period of the variable pattern accompanied by the divided effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B in the change start time effect determination process when the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command is a change pattern that does not involve division effect. Although it is possible to determine the execution of the effect using, if the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command is a change pattern involving division effect, the mode of the push button 31B in the change start time effect determination process. It is impossible to determine the execution of the effect using the device that changes the.

As described above, the predetermined effect device is not operated during the execution period of the divided effect (or during the variable display of the variable pattern accompanied by the divided effect) to determine which image is the first effect image 27TM100. It becomes impossible for the player to easily grasp, and the interest of the divisional effect can be improved.

Here, if the light emission control of the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED is executed corresponding to each of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 while the division effect is being executed, the LED The commands (illumination signals) to the control board 14 interfere with each other, which causes a problem that appropriate LED control becomes difficult. In the present embodiment, such a problem occurs because the LED installed inside the housing of the push button 31B does not emit light during the execution period of the split effect (or during the variable display of the change pattern accompanied by the split effect). I try not to.

Also, a production device (for example, a decorative LED or the like) that can be operated only when the divisional production is being executed (or when the variable display of the variation pattern accompanied by the divisional production is being executed) may be provided. For example, the first decoration LED that does not emit light when the divisional effect is not executed and that emits light corresponding to the effect of the first effect image display area 27TM100A when the divisional effect is executed, and the divisional effect are executed. A second decorative LED may be provided that does not emit light when not performing, and emits light corresponding to the effect of the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the divided effect is being executed. In this way, by providing the rendering device dedicated to the split rendering, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (10), the CPU 120 for effect control pushes a push button by the player within the operation valid period in which the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. When the operation of 31B is performed and the operation is detected by the push sensor 35B (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 10-14 ), the cut-in image 27TM370C in which the character “Great chance!!” is displayed, The cut-in notice effect to be displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A is executed.

At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the cut-in image 27TM370B is continuously displayed as an effect image based on [Movie B].

As shown in FIG. 10-18(11), the effect control CPU 120 causes the first effect image display area 27TM100A to continuously display the cut-in image 27TM370C in which the characters “Great chance!!” are displayed. (T13 timing shown in FIGS. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display of the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the characters "Chance!" are displayed based on the [Movie B] being reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and The teammate character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) are displayed in the 2 effect image display area 27TM200A together with the character "battle" (timing T13 shown in FIG. 10-14). Further, at this time, two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed in the lower part of the second effect image display area 27TM200A together with the characters “expectation degree”.

In this way, as the effect image based on the [movie B] being reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the image regarding the battle effect of the super reach A (the image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A), and 2) A star-shaped object image 27TM550) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (12), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display of the cut-in image 27TM370C in which the characters "Great chance!!" are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, In the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the teammate character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) are displayed together with the word "battle" (timing T14 shown in FIG. 10-14). Further, at this time, four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed in the lower part of the first effect image display area 27TM100A together with the characters “expectation degree”.

Thus, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, as the effect image corresponding to the battle effect of the super reach B designated by the variation pattern designation command, the images of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B), and Four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed.

In response to the development of the super reach effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. The effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100 without enlarging the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period of T14 to T15 shown in FIG. 10-14. During this enlarged display period, the first effect image 27TM100 is superimposed and displayed so that the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second effect image 27TM200 and can be seen by the player in the foreground). Mode).

That is, the display priorities of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 in the enlarged display period are in the relationship of the second effect image 27TM200<the first effect image 27TM100, and the first effect image 27TM100 is enlarged and displayed. Along with this, the area in which the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed is reduced (see FIG. 10-18 (12)). As described above, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than that of the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period. Will be raised. Then, the enlarged first effect image 27TM100 completely covers the second effect image 27TM200, so that the second effect image 27TM200 becomes invisible (non-display).

As shown in FIG. 10-19(13), the effect control CPU 120 divides the first effect image 27TM100 at the timing when the first effect image 27TM100 is enlarged to almost the same size as the effect display area 27TM005A (timing T15 shown in FIG. 10-14). Finish production. At the timing of ending the divided effect, an image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B), and an image of the enemy character B (27TM510B) are displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A as effect images corresponding to the battle effect of the super reach B designated by the variation pattern designation command. Four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed. Further, after the division effect is finished, by blinking the four star-shaped object images 27TM550 displayed at the bottom of the screen, a plurality of expectations (two stars) shown to the player during the execution of the division effect are displayed. And 4 stars), the expected degree (4 stars) finally selected corresponding to the variable display is notified.

That is, even after the end of the split effect, the effect information (the image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect, and the four star-shaped objects are displayed. Since the effect information common to the image 27TM550) will be continuously displayed on the screen, the player can obtain the effect (super reach B battle effect) corresponding to the hidden first effect image 27TM100. Understand what is going on.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the division effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the left part of the screen is displayed. The second effect image 27TM200 is displayed. In the game machine of the first embodiment, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the setting suggestion effect determined based on the change start time effect determination process may be executed together with the effect based on the change pattern designating command. In the second effect image display area 27TM200A, a predetermined movie corresponding to the variation pattern is reproduced, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

If the setting suggestion effect is executed for each of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 which are displayed in parallel on the left and right in the state where the division effect is being executed, whichever of the left and right settings is performed. There arises a problem that confuses the player as to whether or not the set value should be estimated based on the suggestive effect. In the present embodiment, such a problem can be prevented from occurring by not executing the setting suggestion effect in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the number of executions (two times and one time) of the pseudo continuous production and the aspect of the cut-in image (““ in the first production image 27TM100 and the second production image). It is possible to change the form of the display information related to the jackpot expectation degree, such as "Big chance!!" and "Chance!") and the appearing characters (character B and character A). As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the division effect.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the variation pattern of “super reach B big hit [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]” Based on the selection of, the first effect image 27TM100 executes the pseudo-repeating twice, whereas the second effect image 27TM200 executes the pseudo-repeating only once. Further, in the first effect image 27TM100, the character "Large chance!" with the highest jackpot expectation is displayed, whereas in the second effect image 27TM200, "Chance with the second highest jackpot expectation." "!" is displayed. Further, in the first effect image 27TM100, the character B (27TM510B) appears to develop into the super reach B with a high expectation for big hits in the super reach, whereas in the second effect image 27TM200, a big hit among the super reach. The character A (27TM510A) develops into a super reach A with low expectations.

As described above, the first effect image 27TM100 having a long display period has a higher proportion of the effect information having a higher jackpot expectation displayed than the second effect image 27TM200 having a short display period. In this example, the second effect image 27TM200 is an effect image based on the movie B (long), but any of the movie B (short), the movie A (long), and the movie A (short). Also in this case, it is assumed that the first effect image 27TM100 having a long display period has a higher proportion of the effect information with a higher jackpot expectation displayed than the second effect image 27TM200 having a short display period.

With such an effect configuration, the player comes to have an expectation that the effect information having a high jackpot expectation degree is displayed as the first effect image 27TM100, and the interest of the divided effect can be improved. it can.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, description of parts common to those of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be omitted. Unlike the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is capable of executing the setting suggestion effect in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the variation start time effect determination process in the second embodiment. The gaming machine of the second embodiment, as shown in step S27TM2000 to step S27TM2030, determines whether or not to execute the third setting suggestive effect and the effect mode of the third setting suggestive effect, as in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. Thus, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the third setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed. Further, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the presence/absence of execution of the fourth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode of the fourth setting suggestion effect are determined, and the first effect image display area 27TM100A corresponds to the first effect image 27TM100. It is possible to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect.

Further, the gaming machine of the second embodiment, as shown in step S27TM2040 to step S27TM2050, determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, as in the case of the game machine of the first embodiment. Thus, the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

Here, in the fluctuation start time effect determination process of the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern designated by the received fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern involving divisional effects. (Step S27TM3000). Then, in the case of a variation pattern involving divisional effects (YES in step S27TM3000), the presence/absence of execution of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect are determined, and Whether or not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are determined (step S27TM3010).

The fifth setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a set value by the display color of the first effect image frame 27TM110 corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. The fifth setting suggestion effect is also an effect that suggests a set value by the display color of the second effect image frame 27TM210 corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A1), when the set value of the gaming machine is any one of 1, 3, and 5, that is, when it is an odd setting, it is 60%. It is determined that the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is not executed at a ratio, and that the fifth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is executed at a rate of 30%. Then, it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the setting value of the gaming machine is any one of 2, 4, and 6, that is, when the setting value is an even number, the fifth setting suggestive effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is provided at a rate of 60%. It is decided not to execute, and it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 10%, and the red color corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 30%. It is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the aspect.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white. In addition, when it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue, which corresponds to the first effect image 27TM100. When it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red.

Therefore, the player is highly likely to have an odd set value when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue, and is set when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red. Infer that the value is likely to be even. In addition, when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white, it is understood that the setting value is not suggested in the first effect image frame 27TM110.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A2), when the setting value of the gaming machine is any one of 1, 3, and 5, that is, when it is an odd setting, it is 80%. It is determined that the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed, and that the fifth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is executed at a rate of 11%. Then, it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 9%. On the other hand, when the setting value of the gaming machine is any one of 2, 4, and 6, that is, when it is an even setting, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is provided at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to execute, and it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 9%, and the red corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at an rate of 11%. It is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the aspect.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white. Moreover, when it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue and corresponds to the second effect image 27TM200. When it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red.

Therefore, the player is highly likely to have an odd set value when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue, and is set when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red. Infer that the value is likely to be even. In addition, when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white, it is understood that the setting value is not suggested in the second effect image frame 27TM210.

In this way, (1) fifth setting suggestion effect is executed as a common point between the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. In the case, the effect image frame is displayed in blue or red, but when the fifth setting suggestion effect is not executed, the effect image frame is displayed in white. (2) The effect image frame is displayed in blue There is a high point that the set value is odd when set, and a high rate that the set value is even when the effect image frame is displayed in red.

On the other hand, the execution ratio (40%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution ratio (20%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. Further, the ratio of the set value being odd when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue is higher than the ratio of the set value being odd when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue, The ratio of the set value being an even number when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red is higher than the ratio of the set value being an even number when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red.

As described above, the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. Further, the ratio of the setting value suggested by the fifth setting suggestion production corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 to the actual setting value of the gaming machine is the fifth setting suggestion corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. The setting value suggested by the performance is higher than the proportion corresponding to the actual setting value of the gaming machine. That is, the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

In this way, the mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be made different. Therefore, the interest of setting suggestion production can be improved.

FIG. 10-22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the fifth setting suggestion effect is executed along with the execution of the division effect, and is shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 10-2 of the first embodiment. It is a corresponding figure. As shown in FIG. 10-22(1), before the division effect is executed, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, as the decoration identification information. The decorative design (main production design) is displayed in a variable manner. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol). In the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a effect display of a combination of two sets of background images and decorative patterns based on the background image and decorative patterns in the information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A as the split effect is executed. It appears on the area 27TM005A. One of the combinations becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-22(2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the divisional effect and executes the first effect image frame 27TM110 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right part of the effect display area 27TM005A. The effect image 27TM100 is displayed, and the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed together with the second effect image frame 27TM210 in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A. That is, in this example, the first effect information is displayed on the right part of the screen and the second effect information is displayed on the left part of the screen based on the decision to execute the effect control of the first pattern. ing.

Then, in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second In the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the effect image 27TM200, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and the first small symbol in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of symbols is continued.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-22(2), the first effect image frame 27TM110 is red based on the fact that it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100. The second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue based on the fact that it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

Here, in this example, when the divisional effect is executed, both the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed. There is. Not limited to such an example, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue or red) while the second effect image 27TM200 is applied. The corresponding fifth setting suggestion effect may not be executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white). Further, while the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue or red), the fifth setting suggestion corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100. The effect may not be executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white).

In addition, when the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed in a common mode (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is blue). There is also a case where the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is also displayed in red when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 10-23 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the split effect is executed by the gaming machine of the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 10-14 of the first embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 10-23, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 10-14, at the start of variation of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is such that the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is A first pattern effect control displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and a division effect in which a movie B (long) of a type having a long reproduction period among the types of movie B is reproduced is executed, and a type having high expectation It is determined to be “super reach B big hit [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-repetition twice (type Y)]” in which the pseudo-repetition of Y is executed twice.

As shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23, in the second embodiment, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed while the division effect is being executed. The corresponding fifth setting suggestion effect can be executed in parallel. That is, the fifth setting suggestion effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in which the effect with high jackpot expectation is high and the second effect image display area 27TM200A in which the effect with low expectation is high. The fifth setting suggestion effect can be executed in parallel.

FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the division effect of the second embodiment ends. 10-24(12) is a view corresponding to FIG. 10-18(12) of the first embodiment, and FIG. 10-24(13) is shown in FIG. 10-19(13) of the first embodiment. It is a corresponding figure.

In response to the development of the super reach effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first effect image frame 27TM110 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode is being executed, together with the first effect image. Enlarge 27TM100. The effect control CPU 120 expands the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is executed in the enlarged display period of T14 to T15 shown in FIG. 10-14. Without doing so, the combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode is executed is gradually displayed in an enlarged manner. In this enlarged display period, the combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 (the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image frame 27TM210. The display layer is higher than the combination of the two effect images 27TM200, and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that the player can see it in the foreground.

That is, the display priority of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 in the enlarged display period is the relationship of the second effect image frame 27TM210<the first effect image frame 27TM110, and the first effect image frame. With the enlarged display of 27TM110, the displayed area of the second effect image frame 27TM210 is reduced (see FIG. 10-24 (12)). Thus, the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image frame 27TM110 is the same as that of the second effect image frame 27TM210 during the enlarged display period. It will be higher than the visibility. Then, the enlarged first display effect image frame 27TM110 completely covers the second effect image frame 27TM210, so that the second effect image frame 27TM210 becomes invisible (becomes invisible).

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (13), the CPU 120 for effect control enlarges the first effect image frame 27TM110 to almost the same size as the frame of the effect display area 27TM005A (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 10-23). Then, the division effect is ended.

As described above, when the division effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in both of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, so that the division effect can be obtained. The interest of setting suggestion production can be improved. Here, since the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be made different, the division effect is performed. It is possible to further improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect that is being executed in parallel in.

However, as for the gaming machine of the second embodiment, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the third setting suggesting effect (which indicates that the setting value is “6” ( Setting 6 final effect) is not executed.

If the third setting suggestion effect indicating that the set value is high is executed corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 in which the effect having a short display period and a low expectation is executed is high, the first effect is assumed. When the third setting suggestion effect corresponding to the image 27TM100 is not executed, the second effect image 27TM200 is hidden at an early timing, which may discourage the player. In addition, the player will have doubts about the reliability of the third setting suggestion effect executed corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. In the present embodiment, although the fifth setting suggestion effect can be executed corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, by not executing the third setting suggestion effect which indicates a specific setting value with high reliability, I try not to cause such problems.

(Modification of the characteristic part 27TM)
Next, a modified example of the [feature portion 27TM] will be described.

(1) As shown in the characteristic unit 16TM described above, the setting suggestion effect may suggest the setting value by the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the mini-slot 16TM030 in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and below the active display 16TM003, and variably displays the mini-slot 16TM030. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in [Explanation about the characteristic part 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first setting suggestion effect as an effect that suggests the currently set setting value. This first setting suggesting effect is to stop and display the combination of [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] minislot symbols as the same symbol combination in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the minislot 16TM030. By doing so, it is a production in which the role of "bell" is established. That is, based on the fact that the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [bell], [bell], and [bell] is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player sets the set value. Recognize that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting has been executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6(G) described above, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Will be done. In the present embodiment, since the variation start time effect determination process is executed every time variable display is executed, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display described above is [bell] or "off." As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggesting effect is executed every time the variable display is executed, and the first setting is performed with respect to the number of times the variable display is executed. The user is also interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (percentage of execution of the first setting suggestion effect).

In this way, the configuration capable of executing the first setting suggestion effect can be applied to the gaming machine of the first embodiment or the gaming machine of the second embodiment. However, while the divided effect is being executed, the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed, while the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed. To do.

Since the first setting suggesting effect suggests the setting value by the number of times of execution, it is difficult for the player to guess the setting value only by seeing the winning combination of the variable display of the displayed minislot. Is. Due to such characteristics of the first setting suggestion effect, during execution of the divisional effect, the first minislot corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second minislot corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed. If the first setting suggesting effect is executed in parallel with the first mini-slot and the second mini-slot, the player will be confused. Therefore, during execution of the divided effect, the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed.

(2) It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the form shown in the modification example (1), and during the variable display period based on the variable pattern accompanied by the divisional effect, the first setting suggestive effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second None of the first setting suggestion effects corresponding to effect image 27TM200 may be executed.

For example, in the variable display period based on the variation pattern accompanied by the divisional effect, a period during which the divisional effect is not executed (a period before the execution of the divisional effect or a period after the execution of the divisional effect) is in the lower center part of the screen of the image display device 5 ( In the mini slot 16TM030 displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003, which is an area corresponding to neither the first effect image display area 27TM100A nor the second effect image display area 27TM200A. 1 setting suggestion effect can be executed, but during the execution period of the division effect, both the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. It may not be executed.

In this way, when the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 that does not correspond to either the first effect image display area 27TM100A or the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the divided effect execution period In the middle, the variable display of the minislot symbols may be continuously executed in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the minislot 16TM030, and the minislot symbols may not be stopped. By such effect control, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed in the effect display area 27TM005A (entire screen) during the execution period of the divided effect.

(3) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, in the effect image display area of at least one of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A during the execution period of the divided effect. Although the example in which the setting suggestive effect of any type can be executed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and during the execution period of the divided effect (or during the variable display period based on the variation pattern involving the divided effect). The setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type in the effect image display areas of both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

During the execution period of the division effect (or during the change display period based on the change pattern accompanied by the division effect), the effect display area 27TM005A including the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A (entire screen) ), the setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the active display changes in the period during which the divided effect is executed is lower than in the period during which the divided effect is not executed is shown. Not limited to the form, the ratio in which the display mode of the active display changes may be higher in the period in which the divided effect is being executed than in the period in which the divided effect is not being executed. As a result, it is possible to give attention to the manner in which the active display changes in response to the execution of the division effect.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the setting value of the gaming machine has been described, but the setting suggesting effect is not limited to such an aspect, and the power source of the gaming machine It may be an effect that suggests whether or not the set value has been changed when it is thrown. For example, if the setting change mode for changing the set value is controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting change mode is not controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on. The predetermined setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case.

(6) In the second embodiment described above, the types of setting suggestion effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect, fifth setting suggestion effect) that can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second There is a type of setting suggestion effect that can be executed in the effect image display area 27TM200A (fifth setting suggestion effect), and setting suggestion that can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A but not in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. While there are types of effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect), types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but not executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Explained an example that does not exist.

Not limited to such a form, a type of setting suggestive effect that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but not in the first effect image display area 27TM100A may be provided. For example, the fifth setting suggestion effect may be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but may not be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(7) In the above embodiment, it can be executed only in one of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A (for example, the first effect image display area 27TM100A), and the other area. Although (for example, the second effect image display area 27TM200A), the effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect, etc.) that are not executed have been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and these effects in the other area Can also be executed, and may be executed at a lower ratio in the other area than in one area.

(8) The gaming machine shown in the above embodiment is similar to the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2018-191660 or the like, for example, a right-eye image (R) and a left-eye image (R) for forming a stereoscopic image. L) and a display body (for example, an image liquid crystal panel) that can be displayed alternately in the horizontal direction, and the display body is provided in front of the display body to prevent the player's left eye from visually recognizing the right eye image (R). A stereoscopic image display unit (for example, an image display device 5) having a parallax forming member (for example, a lenticular sheet) for preventing the left eye image (L) from being visually recognized by the player's right eye is also provided. May be.

Here, in the ROM of the effect control board, the image data of the stereoscopic image (for stereoscopic viewing) (the image data of the image for the right eye (R) and the image data for the image for the left eye (L)) and the non-stereoscopic image (in the plan view). (For use) is stored. The display control means (for example, the CPU 120 or VDP for effect control) causes the right eye image (R) and the left eye image (L) to be alternately arranged in the horizontal direction based on the image data of the stereoscopic image to be displayed on the display body. The first control and the second control for displaying the non-stereoscopic image on the display based on the image data of the non-stereoscopic image can be executed.

By the display control means executing the first control, only the right-eye image (R) is visually recognized from the player's right eye through the parallax forming body without visually recognizing the left-eye image (L). From the left eye of the person, only the left-eye image (L) is visually recognized without the right-eye image (R) being visually recognized through the parallax forming body. Then, due to the effect of a fusion image at the intersection of the straight line connecting the player's right eye and the image for the right eye (line of sight of the right eye) and the straight line connecting the image of the player's left eye and the image for the left eye (line of sight of the left eye) A stereoscopic view based on the image for right and the image for right eye is possible.

On the other hand, the display control unit executes the second control, so that no parallax is formed between the non-stereo image viewed by the player's right eye and the non-stereo image viewed by the player's left eye. .. As a result, the intersection of the straight line connecting the player's right eye and the non-stereo image (line of sight of the right eye) and the straight line connecting the player's left eye and the non-stereo image (line of sight of the left eye) is the display position of the non-stereo image. And the state becomes planar. For example, a predetermined (single) right-eye image may be used as the non-stereo image, and a predetermined (single) left-eye image may be used as the non-stereo image.

In the gaming machine provided with the display control means capable of switching between the state in which the first control is executed and the state in which the second control is executed in this way, during the execution period of the split effect (or During the fluctuation period based on the accompanying fluctuation pattern), the second control may be executed without executing the first control. For example, in the execution period (T2 to T15) of the division effect shown in FIG. 10-14 or FIG. 10-23, the second control is executed without executing the first control, and the battle effect image after the end of the division effect. (For example, the image shown in (13) of FIG. 10-19 or the image shown in (13) of FIG. 10-24) is switched from the second control to the first control (in a state where stereoscopic vision is possible). May be.

If the first control is performed and the stereoscopic view is possible while the divisional effect is being executed, both the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are provided so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. The image for (R) and the image for left eye (L) that produce a fused image having an appropriate depth in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) of the screen as viewed from the player must be prepared in advance. Disappear. In the present embodiment, the effect data to be prepared is prevented from being excessively increased by not executing the first control that enables stereoscopic vision when the divisional effect is being executed.

(Details of display control section)
Next, a configuration for executing the division effect shown in the above [description regarding the characteristic part 27TM] will be described in detail. 10-25 is a configuration diagram showing the display control unit 123. The drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP (Video Display Processor) 150 is used when the display control command input from the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520 is a command to read image data from a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 160. Reads necessary image data from the CGROM 160 via the CG bus interface 1530 and outputs it to the decoder 1550. The CGROM 160 stores image data encoded (data compressed) by the MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) system or the like. The decoder 1550 decompresses the image data read from the CGROM 160 and writes the decompressed image data in the drawing material data RAM 1560.

The drawing circuit 1510 uses the image data stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560 to generate frame image data for displaying an image of one frame on the image display device 5 and displays the frame image data in the drawing area of the VRAM (Video RAM) 170. Write. In this embodiment, if necessary, a display target object formed of a set of polygons is arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space, texture mapping is performed on the object, and the object is displayed on a virtual screen by rendering processing. Frame image data corresponding to the image obtained by projection is generated. The drive circuit 180 outputs R (red), G (green), and B (blue) image signals and synchronization signals based on the frame image data in the drawing area to the image display device 5. The image display device 5 performs screen display by, for example, a dot matrix system that drives a large number of pixels.

The VDP 1500 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing more commonly called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM 160 may be a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured using the above.

Next, a display mode of the effect image using the three-dimensional object image will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-26 to 10-30. As shown in FIG. 10-26, when an object image is drawn, the VDP 1500 in the display control unit 123 creates a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) object OB to be displayed, which is formed by a set of polygons. If it is assumed that the object is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint EY (for example, viewpoint EY0) by performing a texture mapping on the object after being arranged in a space and further performing a rendering process, a position separated from the viewpoint EY by a predetermined distance. An image IM obtained by projecting it on the virtual screen SC arranged at is obtained by arithmetic processing, and this image IM is displayed on the image display device 5 by controlling the drive circuit 180 (see FIG. 10-25). In the present embodiment, the image IM projected on the virtual screen SC is drawn by perspective projection.

In the following description, the x-axis is the horizontal (horizontal direction of the screen) axis, and the direction from the origin (0,0,0) to the right of the screen is the positive direction, and from the origin (0,0,0). It is assumed that the direction to the left of the screen is the negative direction. The y-axis is the vertical direction (vertical direction of the screen), the direction from the origin (0,0,0) to the screen is the positive direction, and the direction from the origin (0,0,0) is below the screen. It is assumed that the direction to go is the negative direction. The z-axis is an axis in the vertical direction (screen depth direction) orthogonal to the screen, and the direction from the origin (0,0,0) to the back of the screen is the positive direction, and the origin (0,0,0). The direction from to the front of the screen is the negative direction.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27, the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 is based on the effect image EG (an example of an image simulating the effect display area 27TM005A) in which variable display of effect symbols is executed. Then, by performing texture mapping on the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space (FIG. 10-27(1)), the xy plane of the object OB is obtained. The effect image EG is combined (mapped). As a result, the xy plane of the object OB and the effect image EG are integrated in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space (FIG. 10-27(2)). By performing the rendering process for the object OB, the same rendering process is performed for the effect image EG.

The drawing of the object image when executing the variable display of the effect design is executed when the display control unit 123 is controlled according to the contents of the process data. The effect control CPU 120 outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the content of the process data. The display control unit 123 includes information that specifies the data of the object OB to be displayed at that timing. The drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 selects data of the CGROM 160 or the object OB to be displayed according to the display control command input from the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520. Here, the data of the object OB includes position information of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, coordinate information of polygons forming the object OB, coordinate information of texture, and the like. The data of the selected display target object OB is stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560. Then, to the data of the selected display target object OB, information (effect designating information) indicating which effect the data of the object OB corresponds to is added. Based on the effect designation information, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the image data of the selected display target object OB is an effect image object or another background object, and the drawing circuit. Draw the object OB using 1510.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27, in the effect image EG synthesized on the xy plane of the object OB, a set of left, middle, and right decorative patterns is variably displayed. Then, in the virtual three-dimensional space, by changing (deforming or moving) the object OB, the effect image EG in which the variable display of one set of left, middle, and right decorative patterns is also changed (deformed or moved). Will be done. As a result, the aspect of the drawn object image (for example, the length and angle of the displayed straight line) changes, and accordingly, the aspect of the decorative pattern to be displayed (for example, the size and vertical and horizontal directions of the displayed decorative pattern). The ratio, etc.) also changes.

FIG. 10-28 illustrates an example in which the position of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed by rotating the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space with the y axis as the rotation axis. FIG. 10-28(A) is a diagram showing an initial state when the rectangular parallelepiped object OB having the xy plane is combined with the effect image EG in the virtual three-dimensional space. Further, FIG. 10-28 (B1) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the combining process is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z axis with the y axis as the rotation axis. Further, FIG. 10-28 (B2) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the combining process is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z axis with the y axis as the rotation axis.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when drawing an object image, a viewpoint (for example, a viewpoint EY0) corresponding to the object OB is set. The viewpoint EY0 in this example is set at a position facing the xy plane in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space, and the line of sight is set to be parallel to the z axis. That is, the same viewpoint EY0 as the viewpoint when the player views the screen of the image display device 5 is set.

The viewpoint EY0 illustrated in the example of FIG. 10-29 is a midpoint (p, q) [p and q are real numbers] when the coordinates of the object OB in the initial state illustrated in FIG. o/2, p/2), and is at a predetermined distance |r| [r is a real number, r<0] from the z-axis. That is, the viewpoint EY0 corresponding to the object OB in this example is located at the fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space.

The object OB is drawn as an image obtained by perspective projection on the virtual screen SC, assuming that it is viewed from the viewpoint EY0. Therefore, when the object OB after the combining process is in the initial state, as shown in FIG. 28A, an image in which each of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns has the same size is displayed. When the combined object OG is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z axis with the y axis as the rotation axis, the left decorative design has the largest size and the middle size as shown in FIG. 28(B1). An image in which the decorative design is the second largest size and the right decorative design is the smallest size is displayed. When the combined object OG is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z axis with the y axis as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG. 28(B2), the right decorative design has the largest size, the middle size. An image in which the decorative design is the second largest size and the left decorative design is the smallest size is displayed.

As described above, the VDP 1500 in the display control unit 123 performs the texture mapping based on the effect image EG on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space as the combining process, and the object OB on which the texture mapping is performed is performed. By changing (deforming or moving) the three-dimensional object OB after the change (deforming or moving) from the viewpoint EY0, the image is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM. As a result, in the generated image IM, the display mode after the change (after deformation or movement) of the effect image EG mapped to the object OB is naturally reflected. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control unit 123 as compared with the case where the display mode of the effect image EG is sequentially calculated based on only the data of the effect image EG that is not associated with the data of the object OB. Becomes

In the example of FIG. 10-29, the viewpoint EY0 is the fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The position of the viewpoint to be set may be changed in accordance with the game state, the variation pattern, the notice effect, the jackpot expectation degree, and the like, without being limited to such a form. When arranging a plurality of objects OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, a corresponding viewpoint may be set for each object OB. For example, as shown below, when two objects OB1 and OB2 are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, a viewpoint EY1 corresponding to the object OB1 and a viewpoint EY2 corresponding to the object OB2 are set, and the object OB1 is set. For example, the image obtained when viewed from the viewpoint EY1 may be drawn, and for the object OB2, the image obtained when viewed from the viewpoint EY2 may be drawn.

For example, when the above-described divided effect is executed, the VDP 1500 causes the effect image EG1 on which the first decorative pattern is displayed to be the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB1 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. The first synthesizing process for synthesizing is performed. Then, the object OB1 on which the first combining process is performed is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z axis with the y axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28(B2)), and the rotated object OB1 is viewed from the viewpoint EY1. The image as viewed from above is drawn by perspective projection to generate an image IM1 (image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100). Further, the VDP 1500 executes a second combining process of combining the effect image EG2 in which the second decorative pattern is displayed with the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB2 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. .. Then, the object OB2 on which the second combining process is performed is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z axis with the y axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28(B1)), and the rotated object OB2 is viewed from the viewpoint EY2. The image when viewed from above is drawn by perspective projection to generate an image IM2 (image corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200).

Then, the VDP 1500 executes the display control in which the image IM1 is superimposed and displayed on the right part of the background image and the image IM2 is superimposed and displayed on the left part of the background image, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. A composite image including the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 superimposed and displayed on the image is displayed as the effect image of the divided effect.

Here, when the image of the changed (rotated) object OB1 viewed from the viewpoint EY1 is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM1, the viewpoint EY1 is virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z). Fixed point (p1, q1, r1) in space [p1, q1, r1 are real numbers, r1<0, and |r|<|r1|], so that when viewed from a position distant from the viewpoint EY0 Image is drawn by perspective projection to generate image IM1 (∵|r|<|r1|). As a result, the image IM1 (image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100) is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A which is an area smaller than the effect display area 27TM005A.

Similarly, when the image of the changed (rotated) object OB2 viewed from the viewpoint EY2 is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM2, the viewpoint EY2 is virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z). Fixed point (p2, q2, r2) of space [p2, q2, r2 are real numbers, r2<0, and |r| Image is drawn by perspective projection to generate an image IM2 (∵|r|<|r2|). As a result, the image IM2 (image corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200) is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A which is an area smaller than the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In the example of the above-mentioned division effect, as a mode in which the viewpoints are arranged and drawn in the virtual three-dimensional space, a plurality of viewpoints (corresponding to each of the plurality of objects (two objects OB1 and OB2 in this example)) ( In this example, a drawing mode of a multi-viewpoint drawing mode for drawing an image obtained when viewed from two viewpoints EY1 and EY2 is adopted, but a plurality of objects (two objects OB1 and OB2 in this example) are adopted. ) May be adopted as a one-viewpoint drawing mode in which an image obtained when viewed from one common viewpoint EY1′ is drawn.

In the present embodiment, the effect image EG corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, xy on the negative z-axis direction side (front side of the screen) of the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. When the synthesizing process (texture mapping) for synthesizing on a plane is executed, the object OB on which the synthesizing process is performed is changed (deformed or moved), and the changed (deformed or moved) object OB is viewed from the viewpoint EY0. The example in which the image of is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM is shown, but the background image is not limited to such a form, and the background image is an object OB arranged in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. Is performed on the xy plane on the positive side of the z-axis (back side of the screen) (texture mapping), the object OB on which the synthesis processing is performed is changed (deformed or moved), and after that change (deformed or The image IM3 may be generated by drawing the image of the object OB after the movement) viewed from the viewpoint EY3 by perspective projection.

As described above, by changing (deforming or moving) the object OB in a state in which the background image is combined with the object OB, the aspect of the background image displayed on the entire screen of the effect display area 27TM005A of the image display device 5 is changed. It is possible to execute a changing Shake Vision effect. The above-mentioned shake vision effect has not only the effect of changing the mode of the background image combined with the object OB, but also the effect of changing the mode of the effect image EG combined with the same object OB. This shake vision effect may be executed as an effect that suggests that the effect being executed is finished, or may be executed as an effect when the execution period of the effect being executed is longer than a predetermined period, and it is a big hit. It may be executed as a chance-up effect that suggests that the degree of expectation is high.

In the above-described embodiment, the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 of the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command uses the predetermined movie (movie A (short)) corresponding to the designated variation pattern as the second effect image 27TM200. , Movie A (long), movie B (short), or movie B (long)). Here, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, with respect to the second effect image 27TM200, the original image (for example, IM2) for forming the second effect image 27TM200 is set in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. It may be possible to display without performing the combining process of combining with the three-dimensional object OB2 arranged in.

For example, the first movie in which the right decorative design is the largest size, the middle decorative pattern is the second largest size, and the left decorative pattern is the smallest size, and the left decorative pattern is the largest size and the middle decorative pattern is the second size. And a second movie in which the right decoration pattern is displayed in the smallest size are prepared in advance (stored in the ROM of the production control board in association with the variation pattern). Then, when the divided effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the second effect image frame 27TM210 having a predetermined shape is displayed on the right portion of the background image in a superimposed manner, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed. When the first movie is played back within the range and the divided effect based on the effect control of the second pattern is executed, the second effect image frame 27TM210 having a predetermined shape is superimposed and displayed on the left portion of the background image, The second movie is played back within the range of the second effect image frame 27TM210.

As described above, the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without performing image generation based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. It may be displayable. The first effect image 27TM100 can also be displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. May be Further, within a variable display period (or within a divided presentation period) accompanied by divided presentations, a period during which display control is performed to generate an image based on an object OB arranged in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. , A predetermined effect image EG (for example, a movie image corresponding to a variation pattern) is superimposed and displayed on the background image without performing image generation based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. The period during which the display control is executed may be switched.

The object OB may be deformed as well as moved (rotated) in the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z). For example, the rectangular parallelepiped object may be transformed into a cube by changing the coordinates of the vertices of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z). In addition, the rectangular parallelepiped object OB is divided into two rectangular parallelepiped objects OB, and an image corresponding to the first effect image frame 27T110 is combined with one of the divided rectangular parallelepiped objects OB, and the divided rectangular parallelepiped object OB is divided. An image corresponding to the second effect image frame 27TM210 may be combined with the object OB.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9... Frame LED
10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23... 1st count switch 24... 2nd count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Passage gate 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages,
Advantageous state control means capable of controlling the advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A notice effect control means capable of executing a notice effect suggesting that the advantageous state is achieved,
A suggestive effect control means capable of executing a suggestive effect for making a setting-related suggestion,
Specific effect control means capable of executing a specific effect of updating the second display different from the first display while updating the first display,
The notice production control means can execute a notice production corresponding to the first display and a notice production corresponding to the second display,
The game machine characterized in that the suggestion effect control means can change the mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the first display and the mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the second display.

Images